Холодильник super general sg r740nt инструкция

D-Link DNS-327L User Manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Version 1.0 | 27/03/2013

User Manual

ShareCenter™ + 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure

DNS-327L

loading

Related Manuals for D-Link DNS-327L

Summary of Contents for D-Link DNS-327L

  • Page 1
    Version 1.0 | 27/03/2013 User Manual ShareCenter™ + 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure DNS-327L…
  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    Creating Multiple Users …….. 156 Modify Users …………. 160 Configuration …………..87 Deleting Users ……….164 Managing your DNS-327L …………87 Importing Users ……….165 D-Link Storage Utility …………..88 Creating a Group ……….168 D-Link Storage Utility — For Mac ……….90 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 3
    Installing Add-Ons from the Setup Wizard .. 226 Photo Album Wizard ……….258 Installing Add-ons from the Web UI ….229 Editing Photos in an Album ……262 AFP Service ………….. 231 Select a Photo as a Cover image…… 265 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 4
    Share a Photo to Facebook …….. 273 My Music — The Categories ……..325 Share a Photo to Flickr ……..276 My Music — Music on your DNS-327L ….326 Deleting an Album ……….279 My Music — Playback Music on an Apple device 328 Refreshing the Album Database …..
  • Page 5
    Time Machine — Delete a Volume ….419 Setting up a printer using Mac OS 10.8 ……USB Backups …………422 ………………..469 MTP Backups …………. 423 USB Backups …………. 423 MTP Backup Process……..424 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 6: Product Overview

    The DNS-327L also has several Add-on features to enhance your experience, including PhotoCenter, Blogging, Transmission and Audio Streamer among others. 1 Hard Drive(s) not included. 2 D-Link cannot guarantee full compatibility or proper playback with all codecs. Playback capability depends on the codec support of the UPnP™ AV media player. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 7: Before You Begin

    • Windows® XP (with Service Pack 2), Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8 • Mac OS® X 10.5.6 or greater • 3.5” SATA Hard Drive(s) Package Contents • D-Link ShareCenter™ DNS-327L • CD-ROM with Manual and Software • Quick Installation Guide • 12VDC 3A Output Power Adapter •…

  • Page 8: Features

    Section 1 — Product Overview Features ™ DNS-327L The ShareCenter is an easy to install data storage platform used for remote access through a local network or from the ™ Internet. This ShareCenter supports up to 2 SATA hard drives and includes the product features listed below: „…

  • Page 9
    System Management • Share Folder Level Permission • Support mydlink portal • Supports ISO mount • Support D-Link Storage Utility / Setup Wizard • ISO creator • OS Support: Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8 and Mac OS X „ Remote File Sharing •…
  • Page 10
    • Access, and Manage (Copy, Move, Delete, Rename, zip/ • Comply with DLNA HNv1.5 unzip) Files through Web Browser • D-Link new Media Player (including Boxee) compatible • Open Files on Web Browser or from PC’s Default Program • Supports Logitech Squeeze Center •…
  • Page 11
    • AjaXplorer • aMule • phpMyAdmin • phpBB • Joomla • Transmission „ Web Browsers supported • Internet Explorer 8+ • Mozilla Firefox 4 • Apple Safari 4+ • Google Chrome 3+ • Opera 10 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 12: Checking The Hardware Requirements

    Section 1 — Product Overview Checking the Hardware Requirements To use your DNS-327L, you will need at least one hard drive. If you plan to use RAID 1, which protects your data against one hard drive failure, you will need two hard drives.

  • Page 13: Hardware Overview

    Press once to activate USB or press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds to release USB activity. Left HDD/Right HDD Indicates the position of the drive (Left or Right) LED Indicators Illuminates blue or red depending on activity (see the next page for details) DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 14: Led Description

    HDD On/Off: Orange Light(s) — the hard drives are faulty No Light(s) — the hard drives are inactive HDD On/Off: White Light(s) — the hard drives are working Blinking Orange Light(s) — the HDD(s) is writing/reading DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 15: Rear Panel (Connections)

    Press the latch to release the Top Panel and insert or remove the hard drives Latch ™ Prevent theft by tying a cable to the ShareCenter NAS and a desk. Cable is sold separately. Security Lock DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 16: Bottom Panel

    Product Details Reset Button COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Information about the product — DNS-327L Serial Number, Part Number, Manufacturer Number Product Details Press and hold this button for more than 5 seconds to reset the unit to factory defaults. Reset Button DNS-327L…

  • Page 17: Getting Started

    This User Guide will help you get your ShareCenter™ set up in just a few steps. To install the ShareCenter™ on your local network, refer to the steps below, or skip to page 17 to run the setup wizard which will show you how to install and configure your DNS-327L. Step 1 — Remove the top panel by firmly Step 2 — Once the faceplate is unlatched, pressing the latch at the back.

  • Page 18
    If a drive is not properly set in place, the hard drive LED will not illuminate after powering on the device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 19
    Ethernet port. This cable should connect the ShareCenter™ to your local network via a router, switch, or directly to a computer for configuration (cross-over cable required). Step 7 — Connect the power adapter to the power receptacle. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 20: Zero Configuration Setup

    DNS-327L by simply plugging it in and connecting it to your router. Connect your NAS to your mydlink-enabled Cloud Router and Zero Configuration will automatically configure your DNS-327L and automatically add it to your mydlink account. After the short time it takes to do this you can remotely access your NAS from the www.mydlink.com website to manage and monitor your DNS-327L.

  • Page 21
    Open a web browser and login to your mydlink account. The mydlink page will check for new devices and display a New device Found! pop-up notification in the bottom-left corner. Click the notification to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 22
    Double-click the device to add it to your mydlink devices. If you wish to add it immediately, click Yes, but if you are unsure of what to do click No. The pop-up screen displays the Device Name, mydlink number, Network Name, and Admin Password. If you are unsure of what to do, you can always go back to Advanced Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 23
    Section 2 — Getting Started After the DNS-327L is registered, you will be able to access all information about the NAS from the cloud service. This service is already available locally but the mydlink service provides a way for you to view these details from any location. From this location, you can view all physical disk information, and configure RAID.
  • Page 24
    If you have decided to format your NAS using mydlink, select the RAID method from the drop-down list and the click Format button. A pop-up message appears asking you to confirm your choice to format the volume using mydlink. Click Yes to format, No to return to the menu. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 25
    Section 2 — Getting Started The format process takes a while to finish. The format process depends on the speed of your network connection and client CPU. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 26
    Section 2 — Getting Started Once the format process is complete, mydlink cloud will show you the RAID status and the Volume Status. It also displays the size of the drive avaiable and used. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 27: Mydlink On The Dns-327L

    DNS-327L The DNS-327L provides a different UI experience than the usual NAS interface. once connected to the mydlink service. Click the Application button you can access My Music, My Files, My Photos, and P2P Downloads from the main panel.

  • Page 28: Windows Installation

    Note: Windows Firewall presents you with a warning message to unblock the device. Click Unblock to give your computer access to the NAS. Step 2 — Select the Language of your choice and then click the Start button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 29
    Step 3 — Follow the instructions to remove the top cover of your ShareCenter™ . Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Attach the Hard Drives Bracket(s) to the side of the hard drives as indicated. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 30
    Section 3 — Installation Step 5 — Slide one, or two hard drive into an available hard drive bay of your ShareCenter™. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 31
    Click Next to continue. Step 7 — Connect a CAT5 Ethernet cable to your ShareCenter™ and connect the other end to a switch or router (Local LAN). Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 32
    Step 9 — With the power on, press the Next button on the device and check and make sure the IP address of your ShareCenter™ matches what you see on the screen. Note: Allow 1-2 minutes for the DNS-327L to be recognized. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L…
  • Page 33
    Section 3 — Installation Step 10 — A warning message will appear prompting you to confirm the device. Click Yes, to proceed. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 34
    Step 12 — In this step you can create a new password for the Admin username. It is recommended you set a password, however you may also leave the fields blank. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 35
    Click Next to continue. You may also use DHCP to configure the IP network settings of the ShareCenter™. In this situation, leave the parameters blank as your router should automatically configure them. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 36
    Set the Date & Time settings using the calendar drop-down menu. Configure the time settings by manually configuring the Hour, Minute, and Second settings or just click the “Set time from my computer” button. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 37
    RAID format offers. See illustrations below and check the Knowledge Base at the back of this manual for more RAID descriptions. Skip this step if you have setup this system before. By default Standard is selected. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 38
    Section 3 — Installation Step 17 — Select JBOD to see your configuration options. Step 17 — Select RAID 0 to see your configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 39
    RAID configuration. Please see images further down for other configurations. Note — Once you have configured the RAID of your choice, skip ahead to Step 41. Otherwise scroll through this manual to view other RAID installation options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 40
    Section 3 — Installation RAID OPTIONS Standard — Step 18 JBOD — Step 23 RAID 0 — Step 29 RAID 1 — Step 35 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 41
    NAS directly. The Map Drive assigns a letter to each Volume on your NAS. See Mapping a Drive further in the manual for more details. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 42
    Section 3 — Installation Once you have completed the previous step, the Wizard automatically creates mapping drives to your configured Volumes. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 43
    PREV to go back and change your settings. Read the details carefully before making your choice. Step 21 — When you click Next, you are prompted to verify your decision before you continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 44
    Section 3 — Installation Step 22 — The Wizard software starts the formatting process. Initializing, formatting and finally Success. This completes the Format process. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 45
    Step 24 — Under JBOD more than one disk is classified as a complete Volume so when mapping a drive, only one drive letter is needed. Map Drive to Network only shows one drive. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 46
    Step 25 — The Volume Configuration Summary displays a detailed summary of JBOD. Click Next to continue. Step 26 — Click Next, you are prompted to verify your decision before you continue. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 47
    Section 3 — Installation Step 27 — The JBOD is initialized, formatted, and complete in 3 easy steps. Do not click any buttons while this process is ongoing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 48
    Section 3 — Installation Step 28 — To verify your JBOD, login to your NAS, go to Management. Disk Management, and Hard Drive Configuration. This shows the current status of your drives. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 49
    2 Volumes. To explain, if the size of the two drives are different , the spare drive space will be formatted as a JBOD volume. It is better to have drives of the same sizes. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 50
    Section 3 — Installation Step 31 — The Volume Configuration Summary, displays the details of the new configuration. Click Next to continue. Step 32 — Verify your configuration selection before continuing. Click Yes to continue DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 51
    Section 3 — Installation Step 33 — The RAID 0 is initialized, formatted, and complete in 3 easy steps. Do not click any buttons while this process is ongoing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 52
    Section 3 — Installation Step 34 — To verify your RAID 0, login to your NAS, go to Management. Disk Management, and Hard Drive Configuration. This shows the current status of your drives. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 53
    Drive to Network indicates that the NAS has separated the drive into a RAID array. Note: If the size of these two drives are different, the spare drive space will be formatted as JBOD Volume. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 54
    Section 3 — Installation Step 37 — The Volume Configuration Summary, displays the details of the new configuration. Click Next to continue. Step 38 — Verify your configuration selection before continuing. Click Yes to continue DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 55
    Section 3 — Installation Step 39 — The RAID 1 is initialized, formatted, and complete in 3 easy steps. Do not click any buttons while this process is ongoing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 56
    Section 3 — Installation Step 40 — To verify your RAID 1, login to your NAS, go to Management. Disk Management, and Hard Drive Configuration. This shows the current status of your drives. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 57
    Alternatively, you can install the add-on packages available on the CD or from the D-Link website at a later stage. Refer to page 223 for details. Click Next to accept these installations or click SKIP to continue. If…
  • Page 58
    Step 43 — Opting to download the Squeeze Center automatically opens your default browser to download the application. Once Squeeze Center is downloaded, continue with the rest of the installation. Click Save to save the file to your local hard drive. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 59
    Section 3 — Installation Step 44 — Copy the Squeeze Center package from your local hard drive to Volume_1 of the ShareCenter™ . DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 60
    Section 3 — Installation Step 45 — Watch the Add-on Packages being installed. Step 46 — Once the Add-on Packages are installed click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 61
    Section 3 — Installation Step 47 — The next two screens displays the installed Add-on Packages. Click Next to continue to the next window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 62
    Section 3 — Installation Connecting to the mydlink Step 48 — D-Link has provided a mydlink service that allows you to remotely access the files from your NAS through the mydlink portal. Read the installation instructions and wait for the process to complete.
  • Page 63
    Click Next to continue. Step 50 — When the wizard fails to connects you to the mydlink servers and configures your cloud service, the following screen appears to warn you of your network configuration. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 64
    Enter your email address and a password that you can remember. Then retype the password, enter a First Name and a Last Name. Then click the checkbox that reads: “I accept the mydlink terms and conditions. ” Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 65
    Section 3 — Installation Step 53 — A message appears asking you to verify your email address and account. Click OK to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 66
    Click Finish to continue. Step 55 — The ShareCenter™ Setup Wizard is complete. Click Finish to exit the wizard and start using your DNS-327L. Your ShareCenter™ is now installed and ready to use. If your drives are mapped using the wizard, you will be able to access them under your ‘My Computer’…
  • Page 67: Mapping A Drive

    Section 3 — Installation Mapping a Drive Map a Volume on your DNS-327L using Windows® Explorer in Windows® 7. Step 1 — Press the Windows key and the letter E on your keyboard at the same time. The right-side panel displays a list of your hard drives, removable storage, and network locations.

  • Page 68
    Step 3 — Windows will automatically detect all devices on your network including your ShareCenter™ Step 4 — Click on your ShareCenter™ to see the volumes you created earlier. Then select the volume that you wish to access and click OK. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 69
    Step 5 — After selecting your volume, click Finish to proceed. Step 6 — The drive will then appear in your Windows® Explorer under Network. This means the drive is active and ready for use. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 70: Alternative Methods To Mapping A Drive

    Section 3 — Installation Alternative methods to Mapping a Drive You can also map a drive using the D-Link Storage Utility. Once the DNS-327L is discovered in the Storage Utility, and the LAN configuration settings are complete, finding the drives happens automatically.

  • Page 71: Mac — Setup Wizard Installation

    Mac — Setup Wizard Installation To run the Setup Wizard, insert the ShareCenter™ CD into your CD-ROM drive. Step 1 — When the autorun screen appears, double- click the dmg file. Step 2 — Double-click the SetupWizardDNS icon. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 72
    Step 4 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Pull the Top out) and click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 73
    Section 3 — Installation Step 5 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Attach the Hard Drive Bracket(s) and click Next. Step 6 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Install the Hard Drive(s) and click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 74
    Section 3 — Installation Step 7 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Attach the Faceplate) and click Next. Step 8 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Connect to your Network) and click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 75
    Step 9 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Power on the NAS) and click Next. Step 10 — Return to the DNS-327L on your desktop and click the device if you see it onscreen. Alternatively, if you do not see the DNS-327L , check the settings as explained previously.
  • Page 76
    If all is working, click Yes. Otherwise click No and check your set up again. Step 12 — Enter an admin Password. If you have setup this system before, use the password you used before. Otherwise leave the password field blank. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 77
    Step 14 — Create a new password and verify that password by filling in the Confirm Password field. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 78
    IP. In this window, we select Static IP (you manually configure the Device IP ) and click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 79
    Select a NTP server from the drop-down list. Enter a Date and Time manually or click Set time from my computer. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 80
    Knowledge Base at the back of this manual for more RAID descriptions. Skip this step if you have setup this system before Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 81
    Step 22 — Before the RAID configuration is set, a warning message appears to inform you that all data will be erased. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 82
    Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. Step 24 — The formated process is successful. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 83
    Step 26 — To install the Add-ons, select the Add-ons. you wish to install. The Squeeze Center is the only Add-on that is not checked by default. When you click this. download details are provided. Click OK. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 84
    Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. Step 28 — The Add-on packages are installed. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 85
    Click Next to view the next screen. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 86
    Step 32 — Setup the mydlink administration. Click Next to view the next screen. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 87
    Click OK to continue. Check your connection settings or your NAS settings. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 88
    Enter your email address and a password that you can remember. Then retype the password, enter a First Name and a Last Name. Then click the checkbox that reads: “I accept the mydlink terms and conditions.” Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 89
    The wizard provides you with a mydlink number. You can also tick the Add mydlink to My Favorites checkbox, or Save a shortcut to mydlink on my computer checkbox. You can use this mydlink number for future reference. Click Finish to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 90
    Section 3 — Installation Step 39 — The setup is complete. Click Finish. Step 40 — You can now view the DNS-327L in the Finder on the left panel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 91
    Section 3 — Installation Step 41 — Click the icon to view contents on your NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 92: Configuration

    Section 4 — Configuration Configuration Managing your DNS-327L ™ ShareCenter Web UI (User Interface) is a browser-based utility that allows you to manage and configure the different tools and services. The Web UI is divided into three main sections: 1. Home 2.

  • Page 93: D-Link Storage Utility

    DHCP assigned IP address, the ShareCenter™ will be automatically assigned a 169.254.xxx.xxx address. It is recommended that you use the included D-Link Storage Utility software when accessing and configuring the ShareCenter™ for the first time. If you want to change the IP address before logging in or you are having trouble connecting to the ShareCenter™…

  • Page 94
    ShareCenter. ™ If your network is using a DHCP server and the computer receives IP settings from DHCP server, the ShareCenter ™ will automatically be in the same subnet. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 95: D-Link Storage Utility — For Mac

    Step 1: To get started with the ShareCenter™ Storage Utility for Mac, insert the supplied CD into your CD-ROM drive: Double-click the .dmg file. Step 2: Double-click the .dmg file to install the program. In the end you should have the D-link Storage Utility for Mac. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 96
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 3: This opens the D-Link Storage Utility Step 4: Make sure you are connected to your local LAN. Click the Refresh button. The D-Link Storage Utility displays the D-Link DNS-327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 97
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 5: The Storage Utility now shows the DNS-327L, the LAN configuration (toggle between DHCP and manual), and the Volume details. Use the drop-down list to configure your LAN settings and click Apply. Step 6: To configure the NAS, click the configuration button. This opens your default browser.
  • Page 98
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 7: To map the NAS volume, select a Volume from the list then click the Connect button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 99
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 8: The Log-in window appears. Select Guest or Registered User. Step 9: Enter a username and password for the DNS-327L and click Connect. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 100
    Click OK to continue. Use the Disconnect button to disconnect from the mapped drive(s). Step 11: Finder now opens the drive and displays the DNS-327L under the Shared column on the left and the Volumes on the right.
  • Page 101
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 12: When you click the About button it displays the software version number. This comes in handy when updating to a new version. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 102: Web Ui Login

    Section 4 — Configuration Web UI Login To access the Web UI, open the D-Link Storage utility, select DNS-327L from the Network Storage Device list, then click the Configuration button. The following screen will appear: Select System Administrator and enter the password created during the Setup Wizard.

  • Page 103: Web Ui General Layout

    Section 4 — Configuration Web UI General Layout Home After logging in, the ShareCenter™ Home’ tab will appear. You will see the Applications and Management tabs alongside of it. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 104: Applications

    Section 4 — Configuration Applications The Applications tab contains FTP/HTTP Downloads, Remote Backups, Local Backups, P2P Downloads, My Files, and Amazon S3 icons. Click on each icon to see the submenus. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 105: Management

    Section 4 — Configuration Management The Management tab contains the Setup Wizard, Disk Management, Account Management, Network Management, Application Management, System Management, and Status icons. Click on each icon to see the submenus. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 106: Management

    Setup Wizard that allows you to quickly configure some of the basic device settings. Click the Setup Wizard icon to start The ShareCenter the Setup Wizard. Step 1 — Click the Run Wizard button to start the setup wizard. Step 2 — Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 107
    Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Set the time zone from the drop-down menu to the appropriate geographical zone closest to your location. Click Next to continue or click Skip to ignore these settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 108
    Step 5 — Select DHCP to obtain IP settings automatically from a DHCP server (router) or Static to assign the parameters below manually. IP Address: Enter an IP address for the DNS-327L. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask of your network.
  • Page 109
    Click Next to continue or click Skip to ignore these settings. Step 8 — Click Anonymous to create a random account with no specific settings. Click the Test Email button to test your settings. Click Next to continue or click Skip to ignore these settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 110
    Step 9 — Click the Previous button to go back and check your settings. If you are satisfied with the settings, click the Finish button to save and complete the wizard. Click Exit to end the wizard without saving the settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 111: Disk Management

    Note: You can still rebuild a drive using the RAID 1 functionality however you must initiate the rebuild manually. Manual Rebuild Now: If Auto-Rebuild is disabled then you can use the Manual Rebuild option by clicking this button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 112: Hard Drive Configuration Wizard

    RAID format. The following is an example of a standard volume configuration: The Hard Drive Configuration page displays the current RAID configuration under ‘Current RAID Type’ . Click Set RAID Type and Re-Format. The Setup Wizard begins. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 113
    Section 4 — Configuration The ‘Physical Disk Information’ page displays all of the hard drives on the DNS-327L. It shows the array number, vendor, model, serial number, and drive capacity. Click Next to continue. Select the format you want by clicking on the RAID type box (highlight in blue).
  • Page 114
    Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. A warning messege appears indicating a slowdown in access speeds. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 115
    The Volume Configuration Summary, shows a mapping of the Volume Name, the RAID type, the File System used, the Size, and the Disk. Click Format to continue, Previous to go back to your past settings, or Exit to cancel any changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 116
    A warning message will appear to inform you that all volumes and data will be formatted and erased. Click Yes to continue. Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 117
    If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. The system will now update all of the changes made. Please be patient during this process. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 118
    The wizard is now complete. It shows the Volume number(s), file system selected, the type of RAID, and the disk formation in the RAID. Click Finish to complete the process and start using your DNS-327L. Confirm encryption on the Volume by going to Management, Disk Management, Volume Encryption.
  • Page 119
    Select the encrypted Volume and click the Save button. This will save the Encrypted Key on your local hard drive for future reference. Save the file to your local hard drive. Depending on your browser, click OK to save DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 120: Jbod

    Volume Encryption encodes your Volumes to keep it safe from hackers. Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 121
    Click Auto Mount if you wish the encrypted file to be automatically mounted. Enter a password and re-enter the same password to verify your settings. Click Next to continue, Previous to edit any settings, or Exit to leave the configuration process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 122
    The Volume Configuration Summary, shows a mapping of the Volume Name, the RAID type, the File System used, the Size, and the Disk. Click Format to continue, Previous to go back to your past settings, or Exit to cancel any changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 123
    A warning message will appear to inform you that all volumes and data will be formatted and erased. Click Yes to continue. Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 124
    If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. The system will now update all of the changes made. Please be patient during this process. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 125
    The wizard is now complete. It shows the Volume number(s), file system selected, the type of RAID, and the disk formation in the RAID. Click Finish to complete the process and start using your DNS-327L. In order to confirm the Volume on the drive is encrypted. go to Management, Disk Management, Volume Encryption.
  • Page 126: Raid 0

    RAID size or enter an amount in the field provided. Click the “Configure the remaining disk space as JBOD” if you wish to use the remaining space for another RAID configuration. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 127
    Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. A warning messege appears indicating a slowdown in access speeds. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 128
    Click Next to continue, Previous to edit any settings, or Exit to leave the configuration process. If you do not enter a password in the field provided, a message will prompt you to do so. Click Yes to enter Auto Mount and Password details. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 129
    Check the details on the list and click Format to continue or click Previous to make changes. A warning message will appear to inform you that all volumes and data will be formatted and erased. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 130
    Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. The system formats the Volume. If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 131
    The wizard is now complete. It shows the Volume number(s), file system selected, the type of RAID, and the disk formation in the RAID. Click Finish to complete the process and start using your DNS-327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 132
    Section 4 — Configuration The wizard returns you to main Hardware Configuration page. Under Current RAID Type, you can view your changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 133: Raid 1

    Section 4 — Configuration RAID 1 Select RAID 1 to mirror all the hard drives. Click Next to continue. View the Physical Disk Information. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 134
    RAID size or enter an amount in the field provided. Click the “Configure the remaining disk space as JBOD” if you wish to use the remaining space for another RAID configuration. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 135
    Volume Encryption encodes your Volumes to keep it safe from hackers. Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 136
    Click Auto Mount if you wish the encrypted file to be automatically mounted. Enter a password and re-enter the same password to verify your settings. Click Next to continue, Previous to edit any settings, or Exit to leave the configuration process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 137
    Click Yes to enter Auto Mount and Password details. Click Next to continue. The ‘Volume Configuration Summary’ shows details on all of the configured drives. Check the details on the list and click Format to continue or click Previous to make changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 138
    Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. The system formats the Volume. If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 139
    Section 4 — Configuration The system updates. Setup is complete. Setup provides a Volume Name, File System, and Mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 140
    Section 4 — Configuration ™ Once you have completed the wizard. ShareCenter will return to the main screen. The RAID 1 configuration you just set will be displayed. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 141: Upgrade From Standard Mode To Raid 1

    Standard Mode doesn’t offer any redundancy and security of data. It is best then to migrate from Standard Mode to RAID 1. To do this follow these instructions: Step 1 — Insert a second hard drive into the DNS-327L. Step 2 — Replace the top and restart the DNS-327L.

  • Page 142
    Set RAID Type and Re-Format, the Hard Drive Configuration Wizard only has four procedures. Take a look at the two images below to compare. Click Next to continue. Format the new drive as Standard type. Set RAID Type and Re-Format. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 143
    Reconfigure the drive to RAID 1. Click the checkbox to proceed. Click Next to continue. Step 5 — Under Auto-Rebuild Settings, select whether you want to enable auto rebuild or disable auto rebuild. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 144
    Step 6 — A warning message will appear prompting you to confirm whether you want to format your hard drive. Click Yes to continue or No to exit. Click Next to continue. Step 7 — The software communicates with the hardware to build a list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 145
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 8 — The Wizard formats the hard drive. Click Next to continue. Step 9 — The System updates. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 146
    Step 10- Setup is completed when it shows final information on the slot, vendor, model number, and serial number. Click Finish to continue. Step 11 — The wizard returns to the main Hard Drive Configuration . DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 147: S.m.a.r.t. Test

    A warning message will prompt you to stop all services and network activity. Click Yes to continue the Quick S.M.A.R.T. test. The test will run and a percentage completed will display under the Progress Tab. The Start button will change to a Stop button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 148
    Section 4 — Configuration When the test is complete, the results will be displayed in the Result column. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 149: Creating A Schedule

    Click Create To view the Schedule List, click on the Schedule List arrow. A new table will appear showing details of the new schedule created. To delete a schedule, click on the Trash Can. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 150: Scan Disk

    Scan Disk provides a method to test the disk’s file system on your ShareCenter . Scan Disk scans your disks file system for errors and/or corruption. Click Management, Disk Management, and then Scan Disk. Select the volume from the drop-down list you wish to scan. Click Scan Disk DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 151
    A warning message will prompt you to stop running all services (hard drive and network activity). Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel. The DNS-327L will initialize the volume(s) and begin scanning. Please wait while the software scans the volume(s) or click Exit to cancel the scan.
  • Page 152: Volume Encryption

    Click Management, Disk Management, Volume Encryption. The encrypted Volume that you created during the Setup Wizard is shown. Before proceeding with modifying the encryption data, click the Volume you wish to modify. It turns red. Click Modify. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 153
    To change the settings for Volume Encryption, you need to enter the Original Password in the field provided. Alternatively, click the browse button to upload an Encrypted Key File. Click Next to continue. File upload. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 154
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Auto-Mount checkbox to have the system mount the Volume automatically. Enter a New Password and repeat the process. Click Apply to continue. Wait while the Volume is encrypted. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 155
    Alternatively, click Download Encrypted Key File. The file can be saved. Click OK to Save File. Please Note: Using Volume Encryption slows the speed of accessing data off the DNS-327L. However, Volume Encrytion does create that layer of security. DNS-327L…
  • Page 156: Account Management

    However access rules can be created and edited in the Network Shares menu. Click Management > Account Management. Click Users/Groups on the left side and then click Create. The User Setup Wizard will appear. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 157
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 1 — Select Create A New User Account and then click Next to continue. Step 2 — Enter the user name and password for the new user and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 158
    Step 3 — Add the user to a group by clicking the Group checkbox. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Select the network share settings. Select Read Only, Read/Write, or Deny Access. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 159
    • WebDAV is short for Web-based Distribution, Authoring, and Versioning. • Click Next to continue. Select the volumes the user can have WebDAV access to and then select whether to give Read Only or Read/Write rights. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 160
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — The final step is a summary of all the configurations you made. Click Finish to accept the changes or click Exit to cancel the changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 161: Creating Multiple Users

    Enter the amount of users you want to create. Next to the input field is the remaining amount of users you can add to the NAS. Enter a password and confirm it. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 162
    Step 3 — Add the user(s) to a group by clicking the Group checkbox. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Select the network share settings. Select Read Only, Read/Write, or Deny Access. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 163
    Click Next to continue. Step 5 — Enter the amount of disk space you wish to assign the user(s) on each volume. Type 0 to provide unlimited disk space to the user(s). Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 164
    Step 6 — The final step is a summary of all the configurations you made. Click Finish to accept the changes or click Exit to cancel the changes. The User Settings window will show a list of the users created. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 165: Modify Users

    Modify Users Step 1 — Click the user you wish to modify. The user will be highlighted in red. Click Modify to continue. Step 2 — The User Setup Wizard will appear. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 166
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 3 — Change the username or password. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Change the Network Share Settings. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 167
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — Enter the re-assigned amount of disk space you wish to assign the user on each volume. Type 0 to provide unlimited disk space to the user. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 168
    Step 7 — The final step is a summary of all the configurations you made. Click Finish to accept the changes or Exit to cancel the changes. Step 8 — A message will appear stating the user details have been changed successfully. Click Yes to exit the wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 169: Deleting Users

    Step 1 — Click the user you wish to delete. The user will be highlighted in red. Click Delete to continue. Step 2 — A message will appear prompting you to confirm deleting the user. Click Yes to confirm. The user is now removed from the list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 170: Importing Users

    Section 4 — Configuration Importing Users Step 1 — Click Account Management > Users/Groups > Import Users. Step 2 — The Import Users Wizard will start. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 171
    Check the Overwrite Duplicate Accounts box if this is necessary. Click Browse to select the file you want to import. Click Next to continue Step 4 — Assign the privileges and access methods. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 172
    Click Finish to close the wizard or go back to change the imported file. Click the “i” icon to see details of each user. Each user’s details are provided in a list according to username, group name, read/write priveledges, or access control DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 173: Creating A Group

    Step 1 — Click Account Management > Users/Groups. Click the blue arrow next to Group Settings and settings window will appear. Click New to create a new Group. Step 2 — The Group Setup Wizard will now start. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 174
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 3 — Enter a Group Name. Click Next to continue Step 4 — Click the checkbox to select the user(s) you wish to add to the group and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 175
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — Select the Privileges/Access Methods you want to assign to the group. The greyed out selections are assigned by default. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 176
    Step 7 — Select the appropriate WebDAV settings and click Next to continue. Step 8 — Enter the amount of space you want to assign to the group for each volume. Enter zero to give unlimited disk space to the group. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 177
    Step 9 — The wizard is now complete. The last step shows a summary of the group you created. Click Previous to change your settings or Finish to end the wizard. Step 10 — Under Group Settings, a table will display the group you just created. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 178: Modifying A Group

    Click the blue arrow next to Group Settings and the Group Settings table will appear. Step 2 — Select the group you want to modify. Your selection will turn red. Click Modify to change the settings for the Group. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 179
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 3 — The Group Setup Wizard will now start. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Make the necessary modifications to the group and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 180
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — Select the appropriate privileges you want to assign to the group. The greyed out selections are assigned by default and cannot be modified. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 181
    Click Next to continue. Step 8 — Edit the amount of space you want to assign to the group for each volume. Enter zero to give unlimited disk space to the group. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 182
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 9 — When editing the quota, make sure the size is not smaller than the user quota on his/her account. Click Yes to change the quota. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 183
    Step 9 — The wizard is now complete and will display a summary of the group you edited. Click Previous to change your settings or Finish to end the wizard. Exit will cancel all changes you made. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 184: Deleting A Group

    Step 1 — Select the Group you want to delete and click Delete. Step 2 — A warning message will appear asking you to verify if you want to delete the Group. Click Yes to delete the Group or No to cancel your decision. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 185: Quotas

    Click Enable to activate Quota Settings. The status will now display ‘Started’ notifying you that the Quota Settings are enabled. To Modify a User’s Quota Settings, click the blue arrow next to User Quota Settings to reveal a table of users. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 186
    Click Modify to change the user’s settings. The Quota Settings configuration box will display the user account you want to modify. Enter a new quota amount for each volume. Click Apply to confirm your settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 187
    Section 4 — Configuration The modified quota settings will be displayed in the table. For Group Quota Settings, click the blue drop-down arrow next to Group Quota Settings to view the group quota table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 188
    Select the group you want to modify. Your selection will turn red. Click Modify. The Group Quota Settings screen will display the group you want to modify. Enter a new quota amount for each volume for the current group and click Apply. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 189
    Section 4 — Configuration The modified quota settings will be displayed in the table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 190: Network Shares

    At the bottom of the table, the user can navigate through pages and also refresh the window by click on the Refresh button. Click on the Reset Network Shares button to reset the network access list to the default configuration. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 191: Add/Modify Network Shares Wizard

    2) Configure shared folder access rights. 3) Configure network access settings. 4) View a summary of the configuration before completing. Click Next to continue. Step 2 — Select the Share Folder from one of the volumes. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 192
    Step 4 — Select the appropriate access rights for the share. Options to select from are Read Only, Read/Write, and Deny Access. This procedure can also be used to block certain users from accessing certain folders. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 193
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — If you selected Specific user/Group in Step 3, then this step allows you to set the access rights for each Group configured ™ on the ShareCenter Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 194
    No (off ) when using file-based database applications. When enabled “Map Archive”, the file attribute will ™ be copied as the file is being stored on the ShareCenter Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 195
    • AFP is short for Apple Filing Protocol. • FTP is short for File Transfer Protocol • NFS is short for Network File System. • WebDAV is short for Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 196
    • Root Squash — Disables writing to the Root owned directories and files on the system when the user has root access privileges. • Write — provide write permission to the file system. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 197
    If you checked WebDAV as an access method, then this step will allow you to set the access parameters. Click Next to continue. Step 10 — Here a summary of the created shares will be displayed. Click Finish to save your settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 198: Deleting A Network Share

    Select the Network Share you wish to delete. Your selection will turn red. Click Delete to remove the share. A warning message will appear prompting you to verify if you wish to delete the Share. Click Yes to delete or No to Cancel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 199
    Section 4 — Configuration The deleted Share will be removed from the Network Share List. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 200: Resetting The Network Shares

    Section 4 — Configuration Resetting the Network Shares Click the Reset Network Shares button. A warning message will prompt you to confirm your selection. Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 201: Iso Shares Setup Wizard

    . To add an ISO Mount, click on the New button. An easy to configure wizard will launch. Click Next to continue. Select the ISO file to mount. Check the box to the left of the .iso file to select it and click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 202
    Click Next to continue. You can assign Read Only or Deny Access privileges to the ISO Mount share here. Click on the appropriate radio button for the privileges you would like to assign. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 203
    • AFP is short for Apple Filing Protocol. • FTP is short for File Transfer Protocol • NFS is short for Network File System. • WebDAV is short for Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 204
    A summary of the share will be displayed. Click on the Finish button to accept the change and complete the wizard. Through the D-Link Storage Utility, the ISO Mount Share can now be mapped to your computer as a normal network share. DNS-327L…
  • Page 205: Creating An Iso Image

    The following section will describe how to create an ISO image from your NAS, export the data out to your PC. Click Account Management > Network Shares > ISO Mount Share Settings. Click on the Create ISO Image button at the bottom. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 206: Iso Image Creation Wizard

    Section 4 — Configuration ISO image Creation Wizard ™ The ISO image wizard helps you create an ISO image on your ShareCenter Read the instructions for the ISO Image Creation Wizard and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 207: Iso Name And File Path Settings

    — DVD5 (4.7GB) — This creates an ISO file 4.7GB in size ready for burning onto a single-layer DVD at a later stage. — DVD9 (8.5GB) — This creates an ISO file 8.5GB in size ready for burning onto a double-layer DVD at a later stage. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 208
    Section 4 — Configuration Select the Image Path. Click the Browse button to select the destination folder on your NAS. Click the Volume to save it there or click New to create a new directory. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 209
    Section 4 — Configuration Enter a name that resembles the ISO file you are writing. Click Next. A warning message appears asking you to confirm your decision. Click Yes to continue or click No to cancel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 210: Iso Tree Editing

    ISO file will be saved. Click Next to continue. The wizard will create the ISO image. Click the Auto Mount checkbox if you want the ISO file to be mounted automatically. Click Finish to close the wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 211: Verifying The Iso Image

    Section 4 — Configuration Verifying the ISO image ™ Open your Windows Explorer, click the Network icon, double-click your ShareCenter NAS. Double-click the volume you saved the ISO. Your ISO image should be there. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 212: Admin Password

    Password settings. 1. Enter a new Username 2. Type the original Password 3. Enter a New Password 4. Confirm the New Password Click Save Settings to accept the changes or Don’t Save Settings to cancel changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 213: Network Management

    Network Management controls and manages all issues referring to LAN settings. Even though your LAN settings were configured in the Setup Wizard, it can still be configured here. Go to Network Management and then LAN Setup. Click Setup. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 214
    This step allows you to configure your LAN settings. Here you can choose between DHCP Client or Static IP. If you select Static IP, you will need to manually configure your own IP settings. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 215
    Section 4 — Configuration A summary of what you just configured will be displayed. Click Finish to exit the wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 216: Ipv6 Settings

    Section 4 — Configuration IPv6 Settings Go to Management > Network Management > LAN Setup > IPv6 Settings and click the Setup button. An IPv6 setup window will appear. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 217: Ipv6 Setup

    Auto — Requests information specifically from an IPv6-enabled router and automatically configure your settings. DHCP — Requests information from a DHCP server. Static — Enter your own IP configuration Off — Do not use IPv6 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 218
    64; no more, no less. Enter the Default Gateway, and DNS settings. Click Apply when complete. The IPv6 Settings table will now display the settings in table format. In order for the changes to take effect, you are prompted to re-login. Click OK and log in. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 219: Link Speed And Lltd Settings

    Settings button to save the new settings. LLTD: The device supports LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery) and is used by the Network Map application that is included in Windows Vista® and Windows® 7. Select to enable or disable LLTD. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 220: Ddns

    When the user clicks on the “Sign up for D-Link’s Free DDNS service at www.DLinkDDNS.com link, the user will be re-directed to the D-Link DDNS page. Here the user can create or modify a D-Link DDNS account to use in this configuration. DNS-327L…

  • Page 221: Port Forwarding

    Section 4 — Configuration Port Forwarding The DNS-327L supports UPnP port forwarding which configures port forwarding automatically on your UPnP-enabled router. Note: You will need a UPnP router on your network. Log in and click Network Management > Port Forwarding.

  • Page 222
    A message will notify you that the wizard has found a UPnP router on the network. Note that you have to enable UPnP on your router. Click the blue arrow next to port forwarding to reveal the Port Forwarding options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 223
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Add. The Port Forwarding wizard will start. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 224
    Internet via your UPnP-enabled router. Note: You can select more than one port. Click Previous to change the Port Forward Rule or Finish to configure the port forwarding on the UPnP router automatically. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 225: Application Management

    FTP server The Application Management section allows you to configure many services for your DNS-327L. The server and service settings include: FTP server, Add-ons, AFP, NFS, and multimedia services. Let’s begin by looking at configuration options for the FTP server.

  • Page 226: Block Ip List

    Click the blue arrow to open the configuration window. The window expands to include a Blocked IP list and a FTP Server Status report. Click the blue arrow to see the drop-down list. Click New to block a specific IP address. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 227
    Select Permanent if you wish to block the IP address permanently or Temporary if you wish to set a time frame. If you selected permanent, click Apply and continue. If you selected Temporary, then select a time frame and click Apply to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 228
    The Blocked IP list will display the IP addresses you blocked. Click the blue arrow next to FTP Server Status to reveal the FTP details. The FTP server is stopped by default. Click Start FTP Server to run the process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 229
    Section 4 — Configuration After you have clicked the Start button, the Status shows Started. Open your default browser or FTP application and log-in to your FTP server. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 230: Add-Ons

    Section 4 — Configuration Add-ons Add-ons add extra services to the DNS-327L. Here is a look at each Add-on service available. AjaXplorer: ™ Ajaxplorer provides an enhanced “explorer like” interface which can download and upload ShareCenter files over the internet. Ajaxplorer ™…

  • Page 231: Add-Ons

    Click on each of the buttons of the Add-On you wish to enable. Click on each of the buttons of the Add-On you wish to enable. This installs the Add-On packages. This installs the Add-On packages. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 232
    Section 4 — Configuration The wizard installs the selected packages. When the installation is complete click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 233
    Section 4 — Configuration The next two windows shows the packages installed. You can also disable it from this location. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 234: Installing Add-Ons From The Web Ui

    Section 4 — Configuration Installing Add-ons from the Web UI Open your default browser and go to Management, Application Management, Add-Ons. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 235
    Section 4 — Configuration The target program is available on the ShareCenter™ CD. Alternatively, you can download the program from D-Link’s support site and install it . Click Browse to locate the add on packages on your local hard drive. Once you have located the file, select it and click Open.
  • Page 236: Afp Service

    Network File System (NFS) service. To enable this multi-platform file system on your ShareCenter enable it here. Otherwise disable the option to prevent unnecessary CPU overhead. Click Application Management > NFS Service. Click the Enable radio button to turn NFS service on. Click Save Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 237: Multimedia Services

    The Multimedia Share Settings creates a media library from the photos, videos, and audio files. Users can upload files to the designated “Media Share” folders on the DNS-327L and have the multimedia services collate, organize and publish the data in one library. Once these photos, videos, and music files are uploaded to the “Media Shares”…

  • Page 238
    Section 4 — Configuration Go to Application Management, Multimedia Services. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 239
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Add button to connect Multimedia Shares to a Volume. Select the Volume or folder and click Apply. The wizard initializes the process and compiles the data. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 240
    Section 4 — Configuration ShareCenter builds the library automatically When the system has finished building the media library, a success message will appear. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 241: Upnp Av Server

    Click Application Management, Multimedia Services, then UPnP AV Server. Click the Enable radio button to enable the UPnP AV server. Click Save Settings to configure the UPnP AV share. Click Refresh to build up media library DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 242: Itunes Server

    Server The DNS-327L features an iTunes Server. This server provides the ability to share music to computers on the local network running iTunes. If the server is enabled, the device will be automatically detected by the iTunes program and the music contained in the specified directory will be available to stream over the network.

  • Page 243: System Management

    Language The language packs help users customize the DNS-327L to their specific region. Download your language pack from the D-Link website or the CD and follow the instructions below. When you disable the language pack, the GUI will return to English.

  • Page 244: Time And Date

    Select your time zone from the drop-down menu. Click Save Settings. You can also select a NTP server from the drop-down menu to sync the time and date with an online server. Then click Save Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 245: Device

    Enter your device name here. This name is what the device will appear as on the network. By default, the device name is dlink-xxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the MAC address. Description: Assign a device description to the device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 246: System Settings

    Section 4 — Configuration System Settings System Settings provides features to control your DNS-327L. Users can restart the NAS, restore the system to it’s original state, set idle times, shutdown the system, configure settings, and configure system temperature settings. Restart: Click to reboot the DNS-327L.

  • Page 247: Power Management

    Set the amount of idle time before the drives go into Drives: hibernation. Power Click Enable or Disable. The Power Recovery Recovery feature will automatically restart your device from Settings: a previously unexpected shutdown due to a power failure. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 248
    Power On/Off Click Enable to turn on this function. Scheduling: Enable or disable the power on/off days using the check box and configure the time for each day that the power on/off will occur. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 249: Notifications

    Select STARTTLS or SSL from the drop-down menu if it is Secure required by your SMTP server, or select NONE. Connection: Test E-Mail: Click the Test E-Mail button to send a test alert and confirm your settings are correct. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 250: Sms Settings

    Mobile Service Provider. Test SMS button: Click this button to send a test message to your mobile phone to verify the settings are correct and the API URL is functioning with your provider. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 251: Adding An Sms Service Provider

    URL. Enter your SMS Provider name here. Enter the HTTP API URL provided to you. Choose the appropriate type parameter in the drop-down menu for the parsed parameters of the URL on the left. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 252: Event Settings

    You can limit which events are sent as alerts to the Email or SMS settings by checking the events here. Event Settings: Select the information you want e-mailed to the above address or sent over SMS messages to the above mobile number. The items checked will be sent when necessary. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 253: Logs

    Clear Log: Click Clear Log to delete all the existing logs. Backup Log: Click Backup Log to save the existing logs to a text file on your computer. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 254: Firmware Upgrade

    Section 4 — Configuration Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade Page makes it simple to upload new firmware releases to the device. Please check for new firmware on the D-Link support website. If new firmware is available, download the file to your local computer.

  • Page 255: Usb Devices

    IP address(es) of the network UPS slaves to notify them in the event of a power failure. For more details, refer to the UPS Connectivity section. USB Storage Information Click the blue arrow to reveal the USB storage Information. It displays information on the manufacturer, product name, and size (capacity). Click the Unmount button to eject the USB device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 256: Printer Information

    Section 4 — Configuration Printer Information Click the blue arrow to reveal Printer Information. It displays information on the manufacturer, product type, and connection details. Click Clear Print Queue(s) to remove all active print jobs. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 257: System Status

    System Info The System Status information screen provides information on the DNS-327L. System Info provides information on the LAN port, Device Information, and Volume information. Hard Drive Info displays information on all hard drives including the manufacture details, temperatures, size, and status.

  • Page 258
    Section 4 — Configuration Click System Status > Resource Monitor, then click the blue arrow to reveal the resource details. It provides information on the CPU, memory, bandwidth, and processes in action. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 259: Home

    . Home is divided into one main subfolder called My Folder. Under My Folder resides four main apps, My Photos, My Files, My Music, and My Surveillance. Let’s take a closer look at all four apps independently. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 260: My Photos

    — Photo Albums and Photo Gallery. On the right-hand side of My Photos there are 4 main icons. The icons turn blue when you roll your mouse over it. The first icon is “Upload from my computer” DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 261
    Section 4 — Configuration The second icon is “Upload from NAS” The third icon is “Edit” The fourth and last icon is “Refresh” DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 262: Creating An Album

    Section 4 — Configuration Creating an Album Click Upload from my computer. A Create Album window pops up. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 263: Photo Album Wizard

    The Photo Album Wizard will assist you with uploading photos from your computer to the ShareCenter The first step is to create an Album. In the Album Name field, enter your desired name and then enter a description in the Description field. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 264
    If you wish to add more than one photo repeat the process or hold the Shift/Control button on your keyboard and select the photos to add. Click the Open button to add them to the Album. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 265
    Section 4 — Configuration The Photo Album Wizard is now populated with the photos you have selected. Click Next to upload the photos. ™ ShareCenter automatically updates the photos to the NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 266
    Section 4 — Configuration The Photo Album now features your Album. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 267: Editing Photos In An Album

    Click the Album. Click Edit. The screen changes. A Back button appears above Photo Gallery, to go back. A Select All checkbox appears below the Album’s name, to select all the photos to edit. The icon panel changes on the right-hand side of the screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 268
    Section 4 — Configuration Select a Photo to edit. A green check mark emphasis that it’s been selected. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 269
    Select this icon if you wish to Share the current photo to Picasa. the Photo Album. Select this icon if you wish to Share the current photo to Select this icon if you wish to Share the current photo to Flickr. Facebook. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 270: Select A Photo As A Cover Image

    Section 4 — Configuration Select a Photo as a Cover image Click the Set Cover icon. You are asked to verify your instruction. Click Yes to continue, No to exit. The NAS configures the changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 271
    Section 4 — Configuration The configuration is updated and saved. Click Yes, to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 272: Select A Photo To Move

    Section 4 — Configuration Select a Photo to Move Click My Photos, Photo Albums, the Photo Album you wish to select the Photo from. Select the Photo and click Move. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 273
    Section 4 — Configuration The Select Album window opens. Select the Album you wish to transfer the Photo to. Click the checkbox. The Photo disappears from the Album. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 274: Delete A Photo

    Section 4 — Configuration Delete a Photo Click My Photos, Photo Albums, the Photo Album you wish to select the Photo from. Select the Photo and click Delete. The System automatically deletes the file without verification. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 275: Share A Photo To Picasa

    Click My Photos, Photo Albums, the Photo Album you wish to select the Photo from. Select the Photo you wish to share on Picasa. A green check-mark highlights your selection and click Share to Picasa. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 276
    Picasa feature if you do not have a Google account. Enter your Email Address, Password and Sign In to proceed. Google requests you to grant access to Picasa Web Albums. Click Grant Access to proceed. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 277
    Share button. When you click the Share button your files are uploaded to your Picasa Web Albums and another window will pop-up to confirm its success. Note: You will have to enable Photos (Picasa Web Albums) with your Google account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 278: Share A Photo To Facebook

    Select the Photo you wish to share on Facebook. A green check-mark highlights your selection and click Share to Facebook. A pop-up window appears directing you to log-in to Facebook. Enter your details and log-in. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 279
    Section 4 — Configuration ™ Facebook requests you to access and get their D-Link ShareCenter App. Click Go to App to proceed. ™ The D-Link ShareCenter App also requests permission to post images on your behalf. Click Allow to continue.
  • Page 280
    Share. Alternatively, enter the new album name and click the Share button. When you click the Share button your files are uploaded to your Facebook account and another window will pop-up to confirm its success. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 281: Share A Photo To Flickr

    Select the Photo you wish to share on Flickr. A green check-mark highlights your selection and click Share to Flickr. A pop-up window appears directing you to log-in to Yahoo Flickr. Enter your details and log-in. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 282
    Section 4 — Configuration A pop-up window appears directing you to log-in to Yahoo Flickr. Enter your details and click Sign-in. Create a name for your Album on Flickr. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 283
    Section 4 — Configuration ™ The D-Link ShareCenter asks to link to the Flickr account. Click OK, I’LL AUTHORIZE IT, to proceed. Use your DNS-327L to access and upload files to Flickr. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 284: Deleting An Album

    Section 4 — Configuration Deleting an Album Click the Edit button. Click Delete to delete an Album. If you do not select an album, you are prompted to select an item. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 285
    Select an album, a green checkmark will indicate the selection, click the Delete icon. A warning message will ask you to verify your choice. Click Yes, to continue or No to exit. The Album is now deleted from the Photo Albums menu. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 286: Refreshing The Album Database

    Click My Photos, Photo Albums, and click the Refresh icon to refresh the entire database. Before the screen is refreshed, you are prompted to verify your decision to refresh the database. Click Yes, to continue, No to exit. The DNS-327L refreshes the system and is ready. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 287: Managing Photos

    Section 4 — Configuration Managing Photos My Photos contains all your photos on the DNS-327L. Click My Photos from the Home panel to manage all photos. Management Panel: Upload from my computer, Upload from NAS, Edit, Slideshow, Cooliris. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 288: Slideshow Toolbar

    EXIF: View detailed information about the image (File Name, Size, Image Date, Resolution, Camera, Camera Model, ISO, Exposure Time, & Aperture). Rotation button: This rotates the image at 90 degree angles. Gallery Navigation: This provides a pop-up display of all the images in the gallery. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 289
    Section 4 — Configuration Click a photo to go in full screen mode. This is similar to clicking the fourth icon in the icon list, to the right, the Slideshow icon. The screen opens in a new tab. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 290
    Section 4 — Configuration This feature plays the Slideshow. This feature adjusts the speed of the Slideshow. This feature beams your Slideshow to a Local Device or to a TV via AirPlay enabled Apple Device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 291
    Section 4 — Configuration This feature provides GPS information of the Slideshow. This feature transfers the Slideshow to Cooliris mode. This feature EXIF information of your Slideshow. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 292
    Section 4 — Configuration This feature rotates the image of the Slideshow. This feature pops up the browser window of the Slideshow. This feature EXIF information of your Slideshow. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 293
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Cooliris icon. This opens Cooliris in a new tab. Click the arrows on each side of the Cooliris window to scroll between images. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 294
    Section 4 — Configuration Click here to activate Facebook in Cooliris. Click here to activate Twitter in Cooliris. Click here to slide between photos. Click here to activate Full Screen mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 295
    Click on each photo to view separately. The photo is enlarged. On the right-hand side of each image are the social network links. screen mode. Click here to connect to Facebook or click here to connect to Twitter. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 296
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Facebook link to connect your images to your Facebook Click the Twitter link to connect your images to your Twitter account. account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 297: Beam A Slideshow To Your Tv

    Click Apple Device, the ShareCenter will connect to a shared Apple Device on the Network, a message will pop-up after connecting successfully. Press Yes to continue. Now you can enjoy your slideshow on your TV via the Apple Device and your DNS-327L DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 298: Photo Gallery

    Click Photo Gallery to view the images in your gallery. Near the top right-hand corner there are three main icons. Click here to view All Photos. Click here to view By Calendar. Click here to Refresh the page. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 299
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the All Photos icon to view all your photos in your Photo Gallery. Click the By Calendar icon to view your Photo Gallery by date. Click the Refresh icon to refresh the database. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 300: My Files

    NAS. Click My Files. The My Files window provides a list of all the Volumes created on the NAS. Click on any Volume you created to see a directory listing of the files. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 301: My Files — Icons

    Click the icons near the right-hand side of the panel to access the My Files features. Click this button to Upload files to the NAS. Files features. Click this button to Return to the previous screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 302: Upload

    To upload more files to the volume you have selected, click the Upload button. Click the Browse button to find files on your computer to upload to the NAS. Locate the path of the file you want to upload and click Open. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 303
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Upload to start the uploading process. Then click Exit to close the upload window. The file updates to the NAS and is displayed on the directory table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 304: Download

    To download files from the NAS to your computer, select the file you want to download (lighlighted in red) and click the Download button. Depending on your browser download settings, the browser automatically downloads the file to your saved location. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 305
    Section 4 — Configuration Alternatively, click the Save File button and OK to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 306: Copy

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Copy (it turns blue). Under Copy, select a Destination Path or create a new Path. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 307
    Section 4 — Configuration Enter a name for the new Folder. Click OK. Select the newly created folder and click Apply. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 308
    Section 4 — Configuration To verify that the file did copy to the destination, browse to the folder in question. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 309: Move

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Move (it turns blue) Under Move, select a Destination Path or create a new Path. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 310
    Section 4 — Configuration Selct a folder from one of the Volumes and click Apply. Browse to where you moved the file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 311: Delete

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Delete (it turns blue) A verification message appears asking for you to verify your selection. Click OK to confirm. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 312
    Section 4 — Configuration The file no longer exists in the folder. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 313: Rename

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Rename (it turns blue) The Rename window displays the original name. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 314
    Section 4 — Configuration Enter a new name for the file. Click Apply. The Renamed file is now accessable from its original location. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 315: Properties

    Under Privileges, you are allowed to change the ownership settings. The Owner, User Group, and Other users have Read, Write, and Executionable settings. Click Apply once you have made the changes for it to take effect. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 316: Create A Zip File From The Selected Folder

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Create (file name) .zip (it turns blue) The Wizard creates a zipped file in the same folder. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 317: Add To Zip

    Add to zip allows you to add to an existing zipped file. So, take an existing zip (look at the file size). In our example, “bold.zip” (the original file size) is 3.01MB Right click the file you want to “Add to zip” DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 318
    Under Add to Zip, select the zipped file you want to have the file added to. Click the checkbox and click Apply. The Wizard adds the new file to the zipped file. In the example, you can see the new file size. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 319: Unzipping A Zipped File

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any zipped files in the right pane. Select Unzip (it turns blue) The Wizard unzips the zipped file. A new folder is created from the unzipped file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 320: Unzipping A Tar File

    To unzip a tar file on the NAS, select the file you want to untar (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Untar. An unzipped TAR file works when your workstation is Linux-based. The unzipping process works similar to unzipping a normal file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 321: Opening A File

    To open a file on the NAS, select the file you want to open (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Open. Select the file you want to open, right-click it. The file opens in a new browser window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 322: Previewing A File

    (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Preview. Select the file you want to Preview, right-click it. The file opens in a new Gallery-like window. Use the left/right slider to view the image or resize the image from the corner points. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 323: Share To Facebook

    Share to Facebook. Select the file you want to Share to Facebook, right-click it. The browser opens a new Window and redirects you to Login with your Facebook account to automatically upload files to Facebook. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 324: Share To Picasa

    To Share an image file on the NAS to Picasa, select the file you want to share (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Share to Picasa. Select the file you want to Share toPicasa, right-click it. The browser opens a new Window and redirects you to Login with your Google account to automatically upload files to Picasa. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 325: Share To Flickr

    To Share an image file on the NAS to Flickr, select the file you want to share (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Share to Flickr. Select the file you want to Share to Flickr, right-click it. The browser opens a new Window and redirects you to Login with your Yahoo account to automatically upload files to Flickr. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 326: My Music

    Section 4 — Configuration My Music My Music allows users to add music to the DNS-327L. Using this application, users can view, edit and play music straight from the NAS. Access music files on the network. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 327
    Section 4 — Configuration Click My Music to view the My Music features DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 328: My Music — The Interface

    My Music — The Interface Click here to playback music to a Local Device or to an AirPlay enabled Click here to Refresh the screen. Apple Device. The Music Player plays tracks directly off the DNS-327L DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 329: My Music — The Categories

    Click All Tracks to view all the audio tracks on the DNS327L. Click Albums to view all the albums on the DNS327L. Click Artists to view the playlist by artist on the DNS327L. Click Genres to view the playlist by genre on the DNS327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 330: My Music — The Categories

    Section 4 — Configuration My Music — The Categories Click Playlists to view all playlists and create new playlists on the DNS327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 331: My Music — Music On Your Dns-327L

    My Music — Music on your DNS-327L Access your DNS-327L from your network. Click the NAS Volume directly. Copy music directly from your local drive to the MultiMedia Shared Folder of the DNS-327L. Make sure the files are only MP3 format. The NAS does not accept .flac…

  • Page 332
    View your All Tracks window and click the Refresh button. The Playlist is populated with the same tracks you copied and pasted to before. Click Albums to view it in album view. Click Artists to view all the artists in your playlist. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 333: My Music — Playback Music On An Apple Device

    Click the Apple Device, the ShareCenter will connect to the Apple Device on the Network. A message will pop-up after connecting successfully. Press Yes to continue. Now you can enjoy your music on your Apple Device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 334: My Music — The Player

    A Stop button A rewind button A Play/Pause button A Fast Forward button A Replay button A Shuffle button A Volume control You can also view the Genre, duration of the song, size of the file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 335: My Music — Create A Playlist

    The new playlist is created under the Playlists window. The Create a New Playlist menu appears. Enter a name under Playlist Name and click the songs you wish to add to the playlist. Click Apply to add them to the list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 336
    Click on the Playlist to view its contents. Click the Back icon to return Once you are in Edit mode, click the track you want to delete and click to the Playlist menu or click the Edit icon to add delete songs from the Delete icon. the playlist. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 337: My Surveillance

    My Surveillance The My Surveillance app works with D-Link Cloud cameras. It manages your IP cameras from the NAS and allows all streaming data to be saved to the NAS. My Surveillance can connect up to 4 cameras. Click the My Surveillance icon under the My Folder window in the Home tab. By default, My Surveillance is disabled.

  • Page 338
    Click the plug-in advisory to continue. Note: My Surveillance supports the following web browsers: Internet Explorer 8+ Mozilla Firefox 4+ Apple Safari 4+ (Windows) Google Chrome 13+. Click Save File to accept the SurveillanceCenterRealInstall.msi file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 339
    Section 4 — Configuration Once the file is downloaded, double-click or right-click, select Open and install the program. The Surveillance Center Real Install setup wizard begins. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 340
    Section 4 — Configuration Select an Installation Folder location. Click Next to continue. Confirm the Installation is complete. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 341
    IP address, model number and bit rate speed Click Close to continue. To view the Surveillance utility in a browser, open Internet Explorer. When you log in, you can view the My Surveillance icon under the Home, My Folder screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 342
    Logging into My Surveillance for the first time using Internet Explorer, requires an add-on. The add-on pops up at the top of the browser. Click the pop up and click Install This Add-on for All Users on This Computer. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 343
    Section 4 — Configuration The Global Digital, D-Link Corporation add-on warning message pops up. Click Yes to confirm the installation. Once confirmed, Internet Explorer displays the live camera feed. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 344
    Auto Install Camera instructions to configure cameras for later use. If you wish to disable autoinstall click the Disable Autoinstall button. Click Exit to continue. Please Note: The Auto Install Camera function will not work if you modify the password on the IP cameras. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 345
    Click Yes to continue. The browser now displays the Live View. However, if you do not have any cameras connected, the view finder will have no video stream to show. Close the browser tab to exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 346: My Surveillance

    Click on this link to get a Live View of your camera(s) Click on this link to enter Setup mode Click on this link to access Playback. Click on this link to check the Status of the My Surveillance Application. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 347: My Surveillance — Live View

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Live View Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. Live Video DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 348: My Surveillance — Live View

    Patrol Mode for PTZ Cameras S t o p / S t a r t L i v e Manual Recording Digital Zoom Camera details Camera View & General Settings Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 349: My Surveillance — Live View

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Live View COMPONENT DESCRIPTION View the live video of cameras connected to he DNS-327L via the network Live Video To Stop or Start Camera Live View Stop/Start Click the “Manual Recoding” to Stop or Start camera Manual Recording Manual Recording &…

  • Page 350: My Surveillance — Live Camera Panel Explained Ii

    Use the E-map button to toggle between the live camera view and the E-map display. The snapshot button can be used to take a snapshot of the current frame on the selected camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 351: My Surveillance — Single Camera Live Video Mode

    My Surveillance — Single Camera Live Video Mode this button to enter Single Camera Mode. The viewing angle expands to cover all other camera real estate. Click Click this button to return to Split Camera Mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 352: My Surveillance — Full Screen Live Video Mode

    Full Screen Camera Mode. The viewing angle expands to cover the entire screen. Click this Click to return to Split Camera Mode. This can be done in Split Level Mode and Single Camera Mode. button DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 353: My Surveillance — Digital Zoom Video Mode

    You can also click directly on the part of the main image you want to focus on. Use the mouse wheel to control the level of zoom. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 354: My Surveillance — E-Map View

    Note: you must have installed e-map JPEG files in order to use this feature. Click the E-map Upload button to upload images into the database. When you click this button you are directed to the E-map Upload window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 355: My Surveillance — Snapshot View

    You can copy this image to the clipboard by clicking the Copy to Clipboard button or you can save the image to disk by clicking the Save Image button. Click the Close button to exit this mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 356: My Surveillance — Motion Detection Camera Mode

    If the camera is configured to record when motion is detected, the camera icon on the E-map will change to red when an alarm is sounded or motion is detected, as shown below. When motion is detected or an alarm is triggered, click on the red camera icon on the e-map to play the recorded event. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 357: My Surveillance — Configuring Patrol Settings

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Configuring Patrol Settings Patrol Settings are dependable upon the camera you are using. The Surveillance Center works with the following D-Link PTZ cameras: • DCS-5230/5230L, and DCS-5222L/5211L (Patrol Once). Click the Patrol icon to configure the Patrol settings.

  • Page 358: My Surveillance — Configuring Patrol Preset Points

    Preset Point. This brings up the PTZ Preset Point box. Enter a Preset Name and click OK. To edit the Presets click the Preset Point icon and select whichever preset you wish to delete. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 359: My Surveillance — Viewing Preset Points

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Viewing Preset Points Click the Go to Preset Point icon. This icon directs the camera to the designated points. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 360: My Surveillance — Live Video/Playback Settings

    This allows you to select where to save the snapshots taken using the snapshot button on the live video screen and the format they are stored in. Click OK when you are done to ensure settings are saved. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 361: My Surveillance — Osd Settings

    If you have made changes and want to revert back to the default settings, click the Default button at the bottom. Click OK when you are done to save your settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 362: My Surveillance — Playback

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Playback Open Record Camera View Mode Settings/Snapshot/Sync Playback Mute and Volume Slider Recorded Video Playback Digital Zoom Playback Controls Camera details Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 363: My Surveillance — Playback

    The bottom lets you view cameras with the actual size Actual Size View a live video stream of any camera in full scream mode and press Escape to return to the user interface. Full Screen Open the recorded video information Open Record DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 364: My Surveillance — Playback

    The playback controls are used to play, stop, pause or skip through video recordings. You can also adjust the playback speed and zoom levels. This area displays the time and date of the recording, the playback speed and the current state of playback. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 365: My Surveillance — Recording Information

    Click the Play button at the bottom of the window to play the selected recording on the main playback screen. Note: You can backup or play up to 4 selected recordings at the same time. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 366: My Surveillance — Setup

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Setup Camera Setup Audio & Video Setup Recording Setup Event Setup E-map Upload Backup Server Port Setup Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 367: My Surveillance — Setup — Camera Setup

    Once you click Setup, Camera Setup is the first screen to configure. On the left side are the sub-menus while on the right are the configurable options. Camera Setup is divided into four sections. Wizard, Camera List, Camera Search, and Auto Install. Let’s take a look at Wizard first. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 368
    DHCP on your router to detect your camera. You may attempt to skip this preocess using the Skip button. However, once you do this, you will be unable to detect your camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 369
    The next screen appears blank if the camera wizard was unable to find your camera. If you have setup your camera properly, the camera wizard should have detected your camera. The camera then appears in the Search box. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 370
    Camera Wizard will not be able to detect your IP Camera. However, if you have, the Device Information window is automatically populated with your device information. Click the Test Camera button to view streaming video from the connected camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 371
    Select the Quota disk size based on your available disk space. Check Keep the File within the specified duration. Click the Estimate Required Space button to see how much space you have available. Click Finish to complete the Wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 372
    Enter the username and password for the camera if there is one. Select the desired Video Format (dependent on your camera). Finally, confirm if the Vendor and Model are correct for your chosen camera. Click Modify to confirm the changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 373
    Click Yes to exit. You can also delete the camera from the list. Select a camera from the camera list, click the Trash Button. A message pops up. Click Yes to remove the camera from the list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 374
    Section 4 — Configuration A message pops up to confirm the changes. Click Yes to exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 375: My Surveillance -Search And Add Camera

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance -Search and Add Camera Click the Search Button to search all available cameras on the LAN Select one camera and click Add To to add the camera to the list (Camera2) DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 376
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Test Camera button to view streaming video from the connected camera. Click Modify to add the camera to the Camera list then Click Save Settings to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 377
    Section 4 — Configuration A message pops up to confirm the changes. Click Yes to exit. Under Auto Install, click Enable Auto Install to detect other IP Cameras next time you access the Live Video Page. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 378: My Surveillance -Setup — Audio And Video

    Audio and Video configures all your audio and video settings on each camera. Let’s take a look at a single camera configuration. Click Audio and Video. Here you can view all camera audio and video settings. Click on the device to see the configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 379
    Bitrate: This is the number of kilobits per second the video recording will contain. A higher bitrate means a larger output file. Audio Settings: Click the checkbox to enable Audio. Click Save Settings to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 380: My Surveillance — Setup — Recording Setup

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Setup — Recording Setup The Recording Setup configuration tool displays options for each camera. The settings including Quota Setting, Event Record and Recording mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 381
    Section 4 — Configuration Double-click the camera to expand the configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 382
    Record Mode recording • Event Record will wait for event on the camera to be triggered before it begins recording Manual Record — requires you to manually click a record button to begin recording. Record Mode DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 383
    Section 4 — Configuration Motion Detection and Copy Here is an example of a camera’s motion detection configuration page DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 384
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Copy button, you can copy the camera Recording Setup to similar cameras. Click Save to continue. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 385
    Click the blue to set normal recording mode Drag your mouse over the time frame you want to set the recording. The selected frames turn to blue to indicate the recording duration. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 386
    To record by Motion Detection, click the red box. Drag the mouse over the time frame you want to set the recording. The selected frames turn to red to indicate the recording duration. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 387
    To delete recorded frames, click the light blue Delete box Drag the mouse over the time frame you want to delete. The selected frames turn to red to indicate the recording duration. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 388
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Select All to fill in all time Frames with selected Record mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 389: My Surveillance -Setup — Event Setup

    My Surveillance -Setup — Event Setup The Event Setup configuration tool displays options for each camera. The basic settings relate to how you want the notifications sent. The advanced notification settings help you to configure Email and SMS notifications. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 390
    Notifies you when your history (archive) material has reached or exceeded the disk space allocated to it Archived Limit Reached These settings are activated by using the Email, SMS, or Web Page notification settings. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 391
    Click the Enable SMS Notifications. Follow the instructions provided onscreen Click Save Settings when done and click Exit. Note: Make sure your Carrier provides you with the correct information otherwise this feature will not work properly DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 392: My Surveillance — Setup — E-Map Upload

    The E-map Upload configuration panel allows you to import a schematic illustration of the area/office space you want to monitor using your IP cameras. The E-map, in JPEG, BMP, GIF and PNG format is uploaded to the DNS-327L and configured to work with the camera installed.

  • Page 393
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Browse button to find the E-map you want to use. Select the E-map and click Upload DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 394
    Click and drag a camera from the camera list on the left of the image. When you have placed the camera in the correct location, double-click the icon to change the orientation of the camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 395
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Save Settings The file is ready to use. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 396: My Surveillance — Setup — Backup

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Setup — Backup ™ The Backup Setup page allows you to configure the ShareCenter NAS to backup and restore the IP Camera recordings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 397
    Destination path. If you do not have a folder, click the + sign to create a new folder. Type a new folder name then click OK to continue. Select the path, on the NAS, where you want the backup to reside. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 398
    Section 4 — Configuration You should have the Folder name and the Destination configured. Configure a Start Date/Time and a Stop Date/Time. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 399
    Click Save Settings to finish. The archive table at the bottom populates as you collect data. A message pops up to confirm the configuration. Click Yes to continue and the DNS-327L starts to backup the IP camera recordings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 400
    From here you can check which archives to include in the playback list on the playback screen by adding or removing a check from the Playback List column. If you want to delete the archive, click the trash can icon for the folder you want to delete. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 401: My Surveillance — Setup — Server Port

    This page allows you to modify the ports that the Live Video Server, Playback Server and Config Server operate on. You may wish to do this if you have port restrictions on your local network. To change the port numbers, use the provided fields and click Save Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 402: My Surveillance — Status

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Status Camera Status DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 403: My Surveillance — Status

    Log shows a history of all significant events of the Surveillance Center software. You can filter the events shown in the log by checking the checkbox for Type, Camera or Date. You also have the option to backup the log to a text file and clear the log. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 404
    Section 4 — Configuration To backup your files, click the Backup Log button. Select the Save As folder location and click Save. The Log is successfully saved. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 405
    Section 4 — Configuration To clear your files, click the Clear Log button. You are prompted to verify if you want to clear the log. Click Yes, to continue. Now you can see that your previous log disappears. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 406: My Favorites Application

    My Favorites Application The My Favorites Application section allows users to add applications to the Home section so users can easily access these applications. Follow these easy steps to setup Favorite Applications on the Home screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 407: Adding Applications

    Click the Add/Remove button to add Applications. Click the checkbox under each application you wish to add to the Home screen. Click Apply to continue. The shortcut is now created on the Home screen. Click the shortcut to access the application. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 408: Applications

    Click on Test to verify access to the site address and file/folder. If you selected File from the above drop- down list, you must specify the exact file in the URL path, including the file extension. (e.g. http://example.com/test/ testfile.txt). DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 409
    In addition, there is an option to delete a download event at any time. Current download statistics, such as % completed and download speed, are displayed for each event. A refresh button is also provided to produce updated listings at any time. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 410: Remote Backups

    Backup list. You must select the remote backup job first and then click the Modify button. Delete: To remove a Remote Backup job select the job in the list and then click the Delete button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 411: Create Wizard

    NAS or Linux file system. Remote To Local: sets the backup source as the remote NAS or Linux file system and the target destination for the backup files as the local NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 412
    The subsequent backups in the incremental series contain new files and folders plus the links to the first incremental backup. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 413
    Once — Select this option to run the Remote Backup once at a specific date and time set here. Scheduled: Select this option to set the backup to occur daily, weekly, monthly per a specific schedule. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 414
    Navigation buttons: Use these buttons to move up and down in the list when there are multiple jobs configured. Refresh Button: Click this button during a backup or recovery process to monitor the progress by updating the progress completed bar. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 415: Local Backups

    Checking Incremental Backup will have ™ the ShareCenter compare identical file names at the source and destination. Files will only be overwritten if the source file is more recent. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 416: Time Machine

    Adds a NAS folder as a Time Machine destination. Delete: Deletes a NAS folder setup as a Time Machine destination. Remove all Delete all the NAS folders in the list configured as Network Time Machine Destinations. Shares: DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 417: Time Machine — On The Mac

    Enable/Disable click the Enable Time Machine checkbox. Click the blue arrow next to Time Machine Settings to see the configuration options. Click New under Time Machine Settings to access the Setup Wizard for Time Machine. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 418
    Section 4 — Configuration Select the Volume you want to use for Time Machine and click Next A summary displays your backup options. Click Finish. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 419
    Section 4 — Configuration The wizard returns to the Time Machine table. It displays the Volumes you just selected for the backup process. The Volumes are also viewable in the Finder. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 420
    Section 4 — Configuration You can also browse the Volume in Finder. Go to System Preferences, click Time Machine. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 421
    Section 4 — Configuration In Time Machine, click Select Backup Disk. View the DNS-327L Volumes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 422
    Section 4 — Configuration Select the Volume you want to use for the backup and click Use Disk. Log in to the server. Enter a Name and a Password and click Connect. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 423
    The Time Machine backup process is now complete. View your settings once you have set your disk. To deactivate Time Machine, move the slider to OFF. This, however, doesn’t delete the Volumes from the DNS-327L settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 424: Time Machine — Delete A Volume

    To delete a Volume under Time Machine Settings, select the Volume you want to delete — it turns red. Click the Delete button. A warning message prompts you to verify if you want to delete the Volume. Click Yes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 425
    Section 4 — Configuration The Volume is no longer visible in Finder. To Remove all network shares, click the Remove All Network Shares button. A warning message appears asking you to confirm your selection. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 426
    Section 4 — Configuration The Time Machine wizard shows an empty Time Machine Settings window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 427: Usb Backups

    This section allows the user to configure the ShareCenter so that it becomes a backup destination for a USB device that is connected to your DNS-327L. MTP Backups (Media Transfer Protocol) basically backup digital media content from a MTP compatible USB device such as digital cameras, MP3 ™…

  • Page 428: Mtp Backups

    Select Copy to create a new folder in the destination folder. Select Synchronize to overwrite all the files in the existing USB folder named USBDisk1_1. Status: Displays the current USB backup status. Click on the Save Settings button to save the USB Backups settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 429: Mtp Backup Process

    MTP Backup Process 1. Connect a MTP USB device to the USB port on the back panel of the device. The DNS-327L will enter backup mode if MTP Backups has been enabled in the MTP backup settings. 2. Press the USB button to start the backup process. The white USB LED flashes briefly to display that the backup is in the process.

  • Page 430
    3. Go to System Management, USB Devices. Under USB Storage Information, you will see detailed information on the device you plugged into the DNS-327L. You can connect an Android device but enable USB debugging. 4. When the backup is complete, the flashing white LED will become solid white.
  • Page 431: Usb Backup Process

    ShareCenter™ will copy or sync all the files from the source folder to the destination folder. Please Note: No warning message will appear to indicate that all data on the destination folder will be deleted automatically. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 432
    To unmount the USB storage device, you can click and hold the USB button at the front of the DNS-327L for over 5 seconds or you can go to the USB devices menu of the System Management icon in the Management Tab of the Web GUI of the device.
  • Page 433: P2P Downloads

    Here the user can choose to enable or disable the encryption. Bandwidth You can manually configure the maximum download Control: rate and maximum upload rate. Enter the value -1 to set the respective field to unlimited. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 434: Downloads

    The Refresh button allows the user to refresh a selected download. This will remove not the P2P task list so it displays the most updated only the torrent file, but also the partially statistics. downloaded files too. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 435: Amazon S3

    With Amazon S3 support, it is possible to upload the data from your DNS-327L to Amazon S3 or download the data from Amazon S3 to your DNS-327L.

  • Page 436: Creating An Aws Account

    Open your web browser and type the following link for the Amazon Web Services: http://www.aws.amazon.com/s3. Then, click on the link at the top named “Sign Up Now”. Follow the instructions to create your AWS account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 437
    1. Access Key ID 2. Secret Access Key Save these keys in a secure location as your ShareCenter will need them to create the backup and recovery jobs to and from the Amazon S3 Cloud Storage. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 438
    You will need the following configuration data to create a backup/restore job: Step 1: Job Name Settings Enter a 16 character name to identify the name of the backup or the restore job. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 439
    Region: Select your Region from the drop-down menu. Step 3: Server Type Type: Select Upload or Download from the drop-down menu. Backup Type: Use the drop-down menu and select Overwrite Existing Files, Full Backup or Incremental Backup. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 440
    Select the Schedule Mode for the job to be executed. You may select Manual (now or later from the job list), Once (at a predetermined time and day), or Scheduled (a predetermined time on a daily basis). DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 441
    This field of the jobs controls whether the job will execute or not. If the button shows a green triangle, clicking it enables the job to function. If the button shows the red square, clicking it disables the job from executing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 442: Mydlink

    The mydlink service offers a cloud service to DNS-327L users. Connect to the mydlink service from any location and using any operating system. If you are not connecting to the service directly from the DNS-327L, open your browser and type in www.mydlink.com. Sign into your account on the home page.

  • Page 443: Mydlink Verification

    Section 4 — Configuration mydlink Verification Check your e-mail box and click the weblink to activate mydlink account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 444
    Section 4 — Configuration mydink is verified DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 445: Mydlink Java Runtime Machine

    Section 4 — Configuration mydlink Java Runtime Machine Once you log into your account, you will need the Java Runtime machine. The screen provides directions in order for you to download it. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 446
    Section 4 — Configuration The Java Runtime machine takes a few steps. Follow the instructions: DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 447
    Section 4 — Configuration After the Java Runtime machine is installed, run the mydlink application and enter the password. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 448
    Section 4 — Configuration Once you are connected you can view your existing storage on the cloud and the DNS-327L. You can also upload, download files using your browser, create new folders, rename folders and delete folders. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 449
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Volume 1 to see its contents. Here you can create a New Folder, Upload and Download files, Delete and Rename files. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 450: Creating A New Folder

    To rename a file or folder, click the checkbox next to the file/folder you wish to rename. Click the Rename button. A confirmation window will appear for you to rename the file. Enter a new name and click Rename. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 451: Mydlink Settings Details

    Under General Information you can view the properties of your NAS. On display is the Device Name, mydlink Number, Model Name, MAC address (which is associated with your account and NAS), and Activation time and date. Also viewable is the router you are using and file settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 452: Sharecenter™ Nas Status

    • Check to make sure that the LED on your ShareCenter NAS is lit solid blue. ™ ™ If you still cannot access your ShareCenter NAS, reset your ShareCenter NAS and run the DNS-327L Setup Wizard again from the CD-ROM included in your package. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 453: Deleting A Mydlink Device

    Select the device you wish to delete. A warning message appears for you to verify your deletion. Enter your admin password to delete the device. Click Delete Device to proceed. An acknowledgement message appears to confirm the deletion. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 454: Deleting A Mydlink Account

    Under Profile Information, click the Delete account link at the bottom. A warning message appears to ask you if you want to delete the account. Select No, keep it to do nothing or click Yes, delete it to delete the account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 455
    In order to delete the mydlink account you need to enter your password details. Enter your details and then click Confirm Delete. Click Cancel to revert back and keep your account in tact. The Account is deleted. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 456: The Mydlink Access Nas App

    The mydlink Access NAS App Access your files anytime, anywhere with your ShareCenter Cloud NAS and the mydlink Access-NAS app. Stream your stored photos, documents, music, and movies directly to your iOS and Android devices over 3G or Wi-Fi. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 457: The Mydlink Access Nas App — Features

    • Supports “Open in” option to open your files with different apps • Supports AirPlay for playback of your media on other devices • Supports AirPrint to print out your documents • Monitor disk usage and status DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 458: The Mydlink Access Nas App — Compatibility

    • DNS-320L ShareCenter 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure • DNS-320LW ShareCenter 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure • DNS-327L ShareCenter 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure • More coming soon! Note: If you are using a DNS-325 or DNS-345, please use the mydlink Cloud app.

  • Page 459
    : / / i t u n e s . a p p l e . c o m / u s / a p p / m y d l i n k — a c c e s s — n a s / id531078699?l=zh&mt=8 Android (Google Play) https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.dlink.nas&hl=en DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 460: Knowledge Base

    RAID, short for Redundant Array of Independent Disks, is a combination of two or more disks with the aim of providing fault tolerance and performance improvement. There are several different levels of RAID, with each one providing a different method of sharing or distributing data amongst the drives. The DNS-327L supports Standard, JBOD, RAID 0, and RAID 1. JBOD…

  • Page 461
    Because the data is stored on multiple disks, fault tolerance means that if one drive fails, all RAID 1 provides fault tolerance and protection, in data in the array will be lost. addition to performance advantages. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 462: Raid Options

    ™ Here is a list of the RAID options available on the ShareCenter DNS-327L. Standard RAID — creates a single volume for one drive or more drives. JBOD — allows you to create a large virtual disk drive by concatenating two or more smaller drives together.

  • Page 463
    RAID 1 set fails. In fact, as long as any single member of the set remains functional, you will continue to operate normally, with complete access to your data. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 464: Ups Connectivity

    Section 5 — Knowledge Base UPS Connectivity The DNS-327L supports USB UPS, giving users the ability to share the UPS on their local network and protect from an abnormal shutdown due to ™ a power failure. Connect a UPS to the USB port on the back of the ShareCenter Standalone and Network Master Mode: Log into the DNS-327L.

  • Page 465
    Click the blue arrow next to UPS Settings. There are two modes — Standalone and Master. Select Standalone to use the UPS only on the DNS-327L or select Master to share the UPS with the network UPS slaves. The UPS Status screen shows the mode, manufacturer, product type, battery charge meter, and status.
  • Page 466
    Add. Enter the IP address of the other UPS slave on the network. Click the + button to add more IP addresses. Make sure the DNS-327L and the UPS slaves are on the same physical network. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 467
    Once you have entered an IP address, the system will check its database for IP address records. The UPS Settings table will display the IP address(es) you added. Your DNS-327L is now setup as the network master to notify the network slaves about critical power status. DNS-327L…
  • Page 468: Deleting A Ups Slave

    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Deleting a UPS Slave Under Management > System Management > USB Devices > UPS Setting, select the IP address. Your selection will turn red. Click Delete. The DNS-327L will process your request. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 469
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base The IP address will no longer be listed in the table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 470: Usb Print Server

    Note: Only the print function is supported. The device does not support the copy and scan functions of Multi-Function Printers. To add a printer, connect your printer via USB cable to the USB port of your device: The printer should appear in the USB Devices menu of the System Management icon. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 471
    The Windows Add Printer Wizard will launch: ® Select the printer driver from the installed Manufacturer list or use the Have Disk button to browse for the printer driver file. Click OK to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 472
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Once you have selected the proper driver as shown in the browse list then click OK to install the printer. The printer is now installed and the printer queue will appear. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 473: Setting Up A Printer Using Mac Os 10.8

    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Setting up a printer using Mac OS 10.8 Go to Management, System Management, USB Devices to view the printer attached to your NAS. Check the device settings, under System Management, Device, Device Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 474
    Setting up a printer using Mac OS 10.8 Download the drivers from the respective Printer manufacturers and install it on your Mac. (You need to select the proper firmware for Mac OS 10.8) Go to System Preferences, Print & Scan. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 475
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Under Print & Scan, click the plus sign. Under Add Printer, click the IP tab to add the shared printer which is connected to the NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 476
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Enter the IP address and the Queue configuration. Note: Under the Queue section, enter “lp”, (where “lp” stands for Line Printer). Under Location, select Printer Software. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 477
    Select your specific printer. (If you cannot find a driver for your printer, please download the driver from the manufacturer’s web site and install it.) The IP printer now appears under Print & Scan. The IP address is clearly visible in the configuration settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 1: D-Link DNS-327L

    V ersion 1.0 | 06/17/2013 DNS-327L U ser Manual Shar eC ent er™ 2-Bay Netw ork A ttached St orage Cloud St orage[…]

  • Page 2: D-Link DNS-327L

    i D-Link DNS -327L User Manual T able of Con tents T able of C onten ts Product Overview …………………………………………………….. 1 Befor e you Begin ………………………………………………………………… 2 Syst em Requirements ……………………………………………………….. 2 P ack age C[…]

  • Page 3: D-Link DNS-327L

    ii D-Link DNS -327L User Manual T able of Con tents Modifying a Group …………………………………… 169 Deleting a Group ……………………………………… 174 Quotas …………………………………………………………….. 175 Network Shares ……………………………………………… 180 Add/Modif[…]

  • Page 4: D-Link DNS-327L

    iii D-Link DNS -327L User Manual T able of Con tents Share a Phot o on Flickr ………………………………… 269 Deleting an Album ……………………………………….. 272 Refreshing the Album Database ………………… 274 Managing Photos …………………………………………. 275 Slideshow T oolbar ………….[…]

  • Page 5: D-Link DNS-327L

    iv D-Link DNS -327L User Manual T able of Con tents Recording Setup ………………………………………. 365 Recording Setup Componen ts ………………. 367 Even t Setup ……………………………………………………. 374 Even t Setup Components ………………………. 375 E-Map Upload …………………………[…]

  • Page 6: D-Link DNS-327L

    1 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view The D-Link ShareCen ter™ DNS-327L is a 2-Bay Cloud Storage . When used with int ernal SA T A drives 1 , it allows y ou to share documents, les , and digital media such as music, phot os, and video with everyone in your home or oce network. Remotely accessing les thr ough the[…]

  • Page 7: D-Link DNS-327L

    2 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view • Check box con tents • Check system r equirements • Ensure that y ou have the har dware y ou need for your Shar eCent er™ device Befor e y ou Begin S y stem Requir ements F or best results , the following minimum r equirements ar e recommended on an y system used to c ongur[…]

  • Page 8: D-Link DNS-327L

    3 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view F eatures The ShareC enter ™ DNS-327L is an easy-to-install data storage platform used f or remote acc ess through a local network or from the Internet. This ShareCenter ™ supports up to 2 SA T A hard drives and includes the product featur es listed below: • Equipped one 10/100/1[…]

  • Page 9: D-Link DNS-327L

    4 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view • Folder Management • Share F older Level P ermission • Suppor ts ISO mount • ISO creat or • R emote F ile Sharing • My Files ( W eb File Server) • W ebDA V • FTP Ser ver • Mobile device accesss (m ydlink Ac cess NAS) • User/Group Management • User/Group assig nme[…]

  • Page 10: D-Link DNS-327L

    5 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view • M edia Streaming • UPnP A V Ser ver • Suppor ts PS3 / XBO X 360 • Suppor ts UPnP A V > 4GB • Complies with DLNA HNv1.5 • Suppor ts Logit ech Squeeze Center • Suppor t Sonos Digital Music System via Samba • iT unes Ser ver • Audio Streamer (Icestation) • M y Mus[…]

  • Page 11: D-Link DNS-327L

    6 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view • M y Sur veillance • Camera Auto Installation • 4- Channel Motion JPEG, MPEG4 or H.264 R ecording • Audio & Video r ecording in S ynchronization • Auto Rec ycling Recor ding • 4-channel Live Video • 4- channel Synchronous Playback • Recording T ype : Record b y Sch[…]

  • Page 12: D-Link DNS-327L

    7 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view Check ing the Hardw ar e Requiremen ts T o use your DNS-327L, you will need at least one har d drive. If you plan t o use RAID 1, which protects your data against a hard drive failure , you will need two har d drives. This section will help you: • Selec t the hard drives • Determin[…]

  • Page 13: D-Link DNS-327L

    8 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view Har dwar e O v er view F r ont P anel LED Indicators P ower Button Left HDD/ Right HDD C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION T op Panel This panel unlatches simply b y pressing the lever at the back. Unlatch and lift up to insert or remove y our hard drive(s). F ront P anel The casing of the entir e […]

  • Page 14: D-Link DNS-327L

    9 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view P ower LED: White Light — the devic e is on Blinking Orange — the device is booting or restarting No Light — the device is o LED Description USB LED: White Light — the USB St orage is connected Blinking Orange — transferring data, a USB device is being installed or unmounted Orange […]

  • Page 15: D-Link DNS-327L

    10 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view Rear P anel ( C onnections) C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION Cooling F an The cooling fan is used to c ool the hard drives and f eatures speed contr ol. When the unit is rst pow ered on, the fans rotate a t a low speed and later rota te at a high speed when the temperatur e rises above 49 °[…]

  • Page 16: D-Link DNS-327L

    11 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 1 — Pr oduc t Over view Bottom P anel C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION Pr oduct D etails Information about the product — DNS-327L Serial Number , P ar t Number , Manufac turer Number . Reset Button Pr ess and hold this button for mor e than 5 seconds to reset the unit to factory defaults. Reset Button Pr oduct D etail[…]

  • Page 17: D-Link DNS-327L

    12 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted This User Guide will help y ou get your DNS-327L set up in just a few st eps. T o install the NAS on your local network , ref er to the steps below , or sk ip to page 23 to run the Setup Wizard which will show y ou how to install and c ongure your devic e. Getting Star ted Har dwar e […]

  • Page 18: D-Link DNS-327L

    13 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 3 — A ttach the hard drive brackets to the sides of your har d drives with the included screws . Ensure the brackets ar e aligned so that when the hard drive is inser ted, the arro w on the bracket points to the fron t of the NAS . Step 4 — Inser t up to two 3.5” SA T A hard drive[…]

  • Page 19: D-Link DNS-327L

    14 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 5 — Re -attach the top panel. Ensur e the latch is inserted inside the panel. Step 6 — C onnec t an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet por t. This cable should c onnec t the ShareC enter ™ to your local network via a router , switch, or directly to a computer f or conguration (cr o[…]

  • Page 20: D-Link DNS-327L

    15 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Z ero C ongura tion Setup If you hav e a mydlink — enabled Cloud Router , you can take advantage of Z ero C onguration. Zer o Conguration aut omatically congures y our NAS’ s settings for you , and adds the device to your m ydlink acc ount automatically . This allo ws you t[…]

  • Page 21: D-Link DNS-327L

    16 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Check Y our m ydlink A ccoun t Open a web br owser and log in to y our mydlink ac count. The my dlink page will check for new devices and displa y a New Devices! notication in the bottom-left corner . Click on the New Devices! notication to continue .[…]

  • Page 22: D-Link DNS-327L

    17 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted The Conrming New Device windo w displays the Devic e Name , m ydlink Number , Netw ork Name (SSID) , and Admin P assword . The window c ontains the question, Do you want to add this new devic e to your my dlink account? If you wan t to add it immediately , click Ye s . If you are unsu[…]

  • Page 23: D-Link DNS-327L

    18 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted After the DNS-327L is regist ered, y ou will be able to access inf ormation about your NAS fr om mydlink. The mydlink portal provides y ou with the ability to view these details from an y location. F rom this web page , you can view all Physical Disk Info , and congure the RAID . Plea[…]

  • Page 24: D-Link DNS-327L

    19 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted If you hav e decided to format y our NAS using mydlink, select the R AID type from the drop- down list and the click F ormat . A pop-up message appears ask ing you to conrm your choic e to format the har d drive using my dlink. Click Ye s to format or click No to return to the menu .[…]

  • Page 25: D-Link DNS-327L

    20 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted The f ormat process takes a while to nish. The f ormat process depends on the speed of y our network connection and client CPU.[…]

  • Page 26: D-Link DNS-327L

    21 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Once the f ormat process is complet e, m ydlink will show y ou the RAID Status and the V olume Status . I t also displays the size of the drive av ailable and percentage used .[…]

  • Page 27: D-Link DNS-327L

    22 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted The DNS-327L provides a di erent UI experience than the usual NAS inter face once you ar e connected to mydlink. Click the Applica tion button to access My Music , My F iles , My Photos , and P2P Downloads fr om the main screen. Redirect to NAS Applications on m ydlink[…]

  • Page 28: D-Link DNS-327L

    23 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Setup W izard Step 1 — Download the Setup Wizard from http://ww w .mydlink.com/suppor t. Click on the Storage tab t o locate the DNS-327L. Double — click the autorun.exe le to run the Setup Wizar d. Step 2 — Select the Language you pref er and click ST ART . Note: Windows Security Aler t […]

  • Page 29: D-Link DNS-327L

    24 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 3 — P roceed with the setup instructions to r emove the top c over of your DNS-327L . Click NEXT to continue . Install the Hard Drives Step 4 — A ttach the hard drives bracket(s) t o the back of the hard drive(s) as instructed. Click NEXT to continue .[…]

  • Page 30: D-Link DNS-327L

    25 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 5 — Slide one or two har d drives into an a vailable hard drive ba y of your device . Click NEXT to continue .[…]

  • Page 31: D-Link DNS-327L

    26 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 6 — W ith the hard drive(s) installed pr operly into each bay , close the chassis by re-attaching the top panel. Click NEXT to continue . Step 7 — C onnec t an Ethernet cable to your DNS-327L and connect the other end to a switch or r outer (Local LAN). Click NEXT to continue . C onnec […]

  • Page 32: D-Link DNS-327L

    27 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 8 — C onnec t the power adapt er to the power port on the back of the device . Then po wer on by pr essing the power button on the front panel . Click NEXT to continue . Step 9 — With the pow er on, you can select the device from the list. Make sure the IP address of y our DNS-327L matc[…]

  • Page 33: D-Link DNS-327L

    28 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 10 — A warning message will appear pr ompting you to make sure the pow er LED is blinking on the selec ted device. If the LED on your DNS-327L is blinking, conrm by clicking on Ye s . Click NEXT to continue .[…]

  • Page 34: D-Link DNS-327L

    29 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 11 — Ent er the administrator passwor d. F or the rst installation on this NAS, the Username should be admin and the P assw ord should be blank. Click NEXT to continue . Step 12 — Cr eate a new passwor d for the admin username . Click NEXT to continue . Admin P assword[…]

  • Page 35: D-Link DNS-327L

    30 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Networking Setup Step 13 — Y ou may select either Static IP or DHCP Client to congure the IP network settings of your DNS-327L. If you select Static IP , you must enter the r equired information. Click NEXT to continue . Y ou may also select DHCP Client t o congure th e IP network sett[…]

  • Page 36: D-Link DNS-327L

    31 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 14 — If you wan t your DNS-327L to be par t of a W indows W orkgroup netw ork , you can enter a name f or your W orkgroup . This works best when y ou use the same workgr oup name as in your current w orkgroup settings. If you ha ven ’t setup a workgroup y et, you can lea ve the defaul[…]

  • Page 37: D-Link DNS-327L

    32 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 16 — T he Disk Information window show s the Current RAID Ty p e . Y ou have the option of making conguration changes. A ccess to the advanced disk settings is described in the instructions on the screen under the Note . Click NEX T to proc eed to Step 17 and learn about your RAID op[…]

  • Page 38: D-Link DNS-327L

    33 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 17 — Y ou may Selec t RAID T ype JBOD and review the description provided . Click NEXT and sk ip ahead to Step 23 t o proceed using the JBOD conguration. Step 17 — Y ou may S elect R AID T ype RAID 0 and review the description provided . Clic k NEXT and sk ip ahead to St ep 29 to pro[…]

  • Page 39: D-Link DNS-327L

    34 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 17 — Y ou may S elect R AID T ype RAID 1 (recommended) and review the description pro vided. When you select RAID 1 , the Auto-Rebuild Setting button appears. Y ou can click this button to enable Aut o -Rebuild . This would become necessary in the event of RAID failure . Click NEXT and […]

  • Page 40: D-Link DNS-327L

    35 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 18 — With RAID type Standar d selec ted, click NEXT to continue or click SKIP to bypass RAID congur ation. Step 19 — Map Drive to Network. This step allows y ou to assign a letter to each drive on y our NAS. Refer to Mapping a Drive on page 61 f or more details . Click NEXT to contin[…]

  • Page 41: D-Link DNS-327L

    36 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation The Setup Wizar d automatically creat es mapped drives. Depending on which version of Window s you are curren tly using, the drives ma y appear on your comput er as indicated in the screen shot belo w . Click NEXT to continue .[…]

  • Page 42: D-Link DNS-327L

    37 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 20 — Review the detailed V olume Configur ation Summar y , including the drive letter(s) that will be mapped t o your computer . If necessar y , you can click PREV to go back and r econgure . Step 21 — When y ou click NEXT , you will see a warning that the data on your drive(s) will […]

  • Page 43: D-Link DNS-327L

    38 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 22 — During the formatting pr ocess, the Setup Wizard displa ys a progr ess bar . When f ormatting has completed, y ou will see a message that says , F ormat succ essful! Click NEXT to continue. Skip ahead to Step 41 .[…]

  • Page 44: D-Link DNS-327L

    39 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 23 — W ith RAID type JBOD selec ted, click NEXT t o continue or click SKIP to bypass RAID congur ation. Step 24 — W ith JBOD two drives ar e combined into one V olume, creating a lar ge vir tual disk drive. When mapping the drive, only one drive letter is needed . Assign a letter t o[…]

  • Page 45: D-Link DNS-327L

    40 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 25 — Review the detailed V olume Configur ation Summary , including the drive letter that will be mapped t o your computer . If necessar y , you can click PREV to go back and recongur e. Step 26 — When y ou click NEXT , you will see a warning that the data on your drive will be er as[…]

  • Page 46: D-Link DNS-327L

    41 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 27 — During the formatting pr ocess, the Setup Wizard displa ys a progr ess bar . When f ormatting has completed, y ou will see a message that says , F ormat succ essful! Click NEXT to continue.[…]

  • Page 47: D-Link DNS-327L

    42 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 28 — T o verify your JBOD , login to y our NAS and go to Management > Disk Management > Hard Drive C ongur ation . This page show s the current status of your driv e. Skip ahead to Step 41 .[…]

  • Page 48: D-Link DNS-327L

    43 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 29 — W ith RAID type R AID 0 selec ted, click NEXT to continue or click SKIP to bypass RAID congur ation. Step 30 — W ith RAID 0 , data striping spreads blocks of data ov er both drives, cr eating a striped set. The Map Drive to Network screen will show elds f or two drives. Assig[…]

  • Page 49: D-Link DNS-327L

    44 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 31- Review the detailed V olume Configur ation Summar y , including the drive letter(s) that will be mapped t o your computer . If necessar y , you can click PREV to go back and r econgure . Step 32 — When y ou click NEXT , you will see a warning that the data on your drive will be e[…]

  • Page 50: D-Link DNS-327L

    45 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 33 — During the formatting pr ocess, the Setup Wizard displa ys a progr ess bar . When f ormatting has completed, y ou will see a message that says , F ormat succ essful! Click NEXT to continue.[…]

  • Page 51: D-Link DNS-327L

    46 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 34 — T o verify RAID 0 , log in to your NAS, go to Management > Disk Management > Har d Drive C onguration . T his page shows the curr ent status of your drives . Skip ahead to Step 41 .[…]

  • Page 52: D-Link DNS-327L

    47 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 35 — W ith RAID t ype RAID 1 selec ted (this is recommended), click NEXT to continue or click SKIP to b ypass RAID conguration. Step 36 — W ith RAID 1, the drives are mirror ed for r edundanc y . The Map Drive to Network screen will sho w elds for two drives . Assign a letter to e[…]

  • Page 53: D-Link DNS-327L

    48 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 37 — Review the detailed V olume Configur ation Summary , including the drive letter(s) that will be mapped t o your computer . If necessar y , you can click PREV to go back and r econgure . Step 38 — When y ou click NEXT , you will see a warning that the data on your drive will be e[…]

  • Page 54: D-Link DNS-327L

    49 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 39 — During the formatting pr ocess, the Setup Wizard displa ys a progr ess bar . When f ormatting has completed, y ou will see a message that says , F ormat succ essful! Click NEXT to continue.[…]

  • Page 55: D-Link DNS-327L

    50 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 40 — T o verify your RAID 1 , login to your NAS, go to Management > Disk Management > Hard Driv e Congur ation . This page show s the current status of your driv es.[…]

  • Page 56: D-Link DNS-327L

    51 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 41 — Selecting Add- on Pack ages. AjaXplorer , Blog, Photo C enter , Joomla, T ransmission, A udio Streamer , aMule, phpBB , and phpMyAdmin ar e checked by default. Refer t o page 219 for a description of each. Note: Additional add-on applications are av ailable on the D-Link Suppor t s[…]

  • Page 57: D-Link DNS-327L

    52 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 43 — Opting t o download the Squeeze Cent er automatically opens your default br owser to do wnload the application. Click S ave to sav e the le to your local har d drive. Download prog ress will be shown as a perc entage with seconds remaining .[…]

  • Page 58: D-Link DNS-327L

    53 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 44 — C opy the Squeeze Cent er pack age from your local har d drive to V olume_1 of the DNS-327L . When the download is c omplete, under L o cation y ou will see a link to Downloads .[…]

  • Page 59: D-Link DNS-327L

    54 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 45 — During the add-on installation process, the Setup Wizar d displays a pr ogress bar . Step 46 — When nished , you will see a message that sa ys, A dd- on packages installation c ompleted. Click NEXT to c ontinue.[…]

  • Page 60: D-Link DNS-327L

    55 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 47 — The ne x t two screens display the installed A dd-on Packages. Click Enable to enable the Add-on P ack ages. (Refer t o page 220 for more inf ormation about Add-ons.) Click NEXT to continue to the ne x t window . Click NEXT to continue .[…]

  • Page 61: D-Link DNS-327L

    56 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation C onnec ting to m ydlink Step 48 — Y ou may use the free m ydlink ser vice, which allo ws you to remot ely access les fr om your NAS through the m ydlink portal. Read the registra tion instruc tions. Go to www .my dlink .com f or more information. Click NEXT to con tinue. (If you selected[…]

  • Page 62: D-Link DNS-327L

    57 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 49 — The Setup Wizard c onnects you to the my dlink ser vers and congures y our my dlink ser vice. Click NEXT to continue . Step 50 — If the wizard is unable to c onnect you to the my dlink ser vers, y ou will see the following message , advising you t o check your network congur […]

  • Page 63: D-Link DNS-327L

    58 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 51 — The next screen allows y ou add your NAS to y our my dlink account. If you clicked Y es, I already hav e a m ydlink ac count , ent er your E-mail addr ess and password . Click NEXT to continue . Step 52 — Y ou can creat e a new account by selecting , No , I need to sign up for a ne[…]

  • Page 64: D-Link DNS-327L

    59 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 53 — A message appears asking you to V erify your e -mail . It explains that you ha ve been sent a v erication email Y ou need to open it and click on the activation link in order to nish activating your acc ount. Click OK to continue .[…]

  • Page 65: D-Link DNS-327L

    60 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 55 — Setup is Complete! Y our device is now installed and ready to use . Click FINISH to exit the wizard . W izard C omplete If you mapped your drive(s) using the wizar d, y ou will see the drive letter(s) on this scr een. If you did not use the wizard to map the driv es, you can manual[…]

  • Page 66: D-Link DNS-327L

    61 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Mapping a Drive Map a V olume on y our DNS-327L using Windo ws® Explorer in Windows® 7. Step 1 — P ress the Window s key and the letter E on your keyboar d at the same time. Y ou will see a list of y our Hard Drives , D evices with Remov able Storage , and Network L oc ations . (If you hav[…]

  • Page 67: D-Link DNS-327L

    62 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 3 — Window s will automatically d etect all devices on your network including your DNS-327L. Step 4 — Click on DLINK DNS-327L to see the f olders representing the volumes y ou created during har d drive installation. Then select the folder that y ou wish to acc ess and click OK .[…]

  • Page 68: D-Link DNS-327L

    63 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 5 — T he path to the folder will be sho wn in the F older eld of the Map Network Drive screen. Click F inish to proceed . Step 6 — The v olumes will then be listed in Windows® Explor er below Computer , directly above Network . This indicates the drive is active and ready f or use.[…]

  • Page 69: D-Link DNS-327L

    64 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Alterna tive Methods of Mapping a Drive Y ou can also map a drive using the D-Link Storage Utility . Once the DNS-327L is detected on the network , and the LAN settings have been congured , volumes av ailable for mapping will be visible under the V olume Name . T o map the dr ive , selec […]

  • Page 70: D-Link DNS-327L

    65 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Mac I nstallation Setup W izard Download the Mac Setup Wizard for the DNS-327L fr om http://ww w .my dlink.com/suppor t. Click on the Storage tab t o locate the DNS-327L. Step 2 — Double — click the SetupWizardDNS-327L ic on. Step 1 — Once do wnload has completed , double — click the Setup W[…]

  • Page 71: D-Link DNS-327L

    66 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 3 — Click ST ART to begin the Setup Wizard . Keep in mind that as you pr oceed, y ou will be able to click PREV any time y ou need to go back and make changes. Step 4 — F ollow the instruc tions to remo ve the top c over of y our DNS-327L and click NEXT .[…]

  • Page 72: D-Link DNS-327L

    67 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 5 — A ttach the Hard Drive Br acket(s) as instruc ted and click NEXT . Step 6 — Install one or two hard drive(s) as sho wn and click NEXT .[…]

  • Page 73: D-Link DNS-327L

    68 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 7 — Close the chassis by r e -attaching the top cov er to the device and click NEXT . Step 8 — C onnec t the Ethernet cable to your DNS-327L, and connect the other end to a switch or r outer and click NEXT .[…]

  • Page 74: D-Link DNS-327L

    69 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 9 — C onnect the power adapter connector to the po wer por t on the back of the NAS. P ower on the DNS-327L by pr essing the power button on the fron t panel and click NEXT . Step 10 — W ith the power on, y ou can select the device from the list. Make sure the IP address of y our DNS-32[…]

  • Page 75: D-Link DNS-327L

    70 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 11 — A warning message will appear pr ompting you to make sure the pow er LED is blinking on the selec ted device. If the LED on your DNS-327L is blinking, conrm by clicking on Ye s . O ther wise click No and check your set up again. Step 12 — Ent er the administrator passwor d. F or[…]

  • Page 76: D-Link DNS-327L

    71 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 13 — If you ent ered an incorrect passwor d from a previous installation, a warning message prompts y ou to tr y again or leave the passwor d blank . Click OK to continue . Step 14 — Cr eate a new passwor d and verify that passw ord by lling in the C onrm Passw ord eld. Click N[…]

  • Page 77: D-Link DNS-327L

    72 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 15 — T o congure the Device IP , selec t either DHCP Client or Static IP . When DHCP Client is selected, the r outer automatically congures the devic e IP . Click NEXT to continue . Step 16 — When Static IP is selected, y ou must manually congure the device . Enter the requir e[…]

  • Page 78: D-Link DNS-327L

    73 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 17 — If you w ant your DNS-327L to be part of a W orkgroup network, you can enter a name f or your W ork group . This works best when you use the same w orkgroup name as in y our current workgr oup settings. If you hav en ’t setup a w orkgroup y et, you can leav e the default name, wo[…]

  • Page 79: D-Link DNS-327L

    74 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 19 — T he Disk I nformation windo w shows the Curr ent RAID Ty p e . Y ou have the option of making conguration changes. A ccess to the advanced disk settings is described in the instructions on the screen under the Note . Click NEX T to proc eed to Step 20 and learn about your RAID […]

  • Page 80: D-Link DNS-327L

    75 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 21 — Review the detailed V olume Congur ation Summary . I f necessar y , you can click PREV to go back and recongur e. Step 22 — When y ou click NEXT to pr oceed with formatting , you will see a warning that the data on y our drive(s) will be erased. Click Ye s to continue , or No[…]

  • Page 81: D-Link DNS-327L

    76 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 23 — During the formatting pr ocess, the Setup Wizard displa ys a progr ess bar . The rst st ep is Initializing , and the next step is formatting . Step 24 — When t he formatting pr ocess is nearly complete , the progr ess bar will display 100%.[…]

  • Page 82: D-Link DNS-327L

    77 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 25 — When f ormatting has completed , you will see a message that say s, F ormat succ essful! Click NEXT to continue. Step 26 — A vailable A dd- on pack ages are listed . Make sure the check box es are checked b y the ones you wish to install . Refer to page 219 for a description of eac[…]

  • Page 83: D-Link DNS-327L

    78 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 27- Click NEXT to install the selected add-on pack ages. Step 28 — During the add-on installation process, the Setup Wizar d displays a pr ogress bar .[…]

  • Page 84: D-Link DNS-327L

    79 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 29 — When installa tion is complete, y ou will see a message that says , Add- on packages installation c ompleted . Click NEXT . Step 30 — T his screen displays all the packages installed. Click Enable to enable the add-on pack ages. Depending on how many packages you initially installe[…]

  • Page 85: D-Link DNS-327L

    80 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 31 — If you installed mor e than seven add-ons, you will see the second screen. Click NEXT to c ontinue. Step 32 — Y ou may use the free m ydlink ser vice, which allo ws you to remot ely access les fr om your NAS through the m ydlink portal. Read the registra tion instruc tions. Go t[…]

  • Page 86: D-Link DNS-327L

    81 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 33 — The S etup Wizard c onnec ts you to the m ydlink servers and congures y our my dlink ser vice. Step 34 — If you ar e unable to connect to the my dlink registra tion site , a warning message noties you of an unsuccessful c onnec tion. Click OK to continue . Check your network […]

  • Page 87: D-Link DNS-327L

    82 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 35 — The next screen allows y ou add your NAS to y our my dlink account . If you clicked Y es , I already ha ve a m ydlink ac count , en ter your E-mail addr ess and Passw ord . Click Nex t to continiue . Step 36 — Y ou can create a new acc ount by selecting, No , I need to sign up for […]

  • Page 88: D-Link DNS-327L

    83 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 37 — A message appears asking you to V erify your e-mail . Follo w the instructions in order to activate your ac count. Click OK to con tinue. Step 38 — The wizar d provides y ou with a mydlink No . Y ou can use this my dlink number for futur e refer ence. Y ou can also check the box es[…]

  • Page 89: D-Link DNS-327L

    84 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 39 — Setup is Complete! Y our device is now installed and ready to use . Click FINISH to exit the Setup Wizard . Step 40 — Y ou should now be able to see the DNS-327L in the F inder on the left panel.[…]

  • Page 90: D-Link DNS-327L

    85 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 3 — Installation Step 41 — Click the icon t o view contents of y our NAS.[…]

  • Page 91: D-Link DNS-327L

    86 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation DNS-327L W eb UI (User Inter face) is a bro wser-based utility that allows you t o manage and congure the di erent tools and services. The W eb UI is divided into three main sections: 1. Home 2. Applications 3. Management Managing Y our DNS -327L SECTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Managemen[…]

  • Page 92: D-Link DNS-327L

    87 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted When rst pow ered on, during the initial boot sequence, the D NS-327L will wait to be assigned an I P address via DHCP . I f it does not receiv e a DHCP assigned IP address , the device will be automatically assigned a 169.254.xxx.xxx addr ess. It is recommended that you use the inclu[…]

  • Page 93: D-Link DNS-327L

    88 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Selec t the DNS-327L from the list and click the Congur ation button. This will launch the comput er ’ s default web bro wser and direct it to the IP address list ed for the device . Make sure the bro wser is not congured t o use a pro x y ser ver . Note: The computer used t o ac[…]

  • Page 94: D-Link DNS-327L

    89 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted D -Link Stor age Utility — F or Mac Step 1: Download the D-Link Storage Utility for Mac from h ttp://ww w .my dlink .com/support. D ouble — click the .dmg le to install the progr am. 1 Step 2: After installation, y ou should see the icon for the D -Link Storage Utility for Mac .[…]

  • Page 95: D-Link DNS-327L

    90 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 3: Open the D-Link Storage Utility . Step 4: Make sure y ou are connected to your local LAN. Click the Refresh button to refr esh the Network Storage Device list. The D -Link Storage Utility will display the D-Link DNS-327L.[…]

  • Page 96: D-Link DNS-327L

    91 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 5: Select Enable by Receive DHCP to obtain IP settings automatically from a DHCP server . W hen Disable is selec ted, Static IP allo ws you to assig n the following par ameters manually : IP : Enter an IP address f or the DNS-327L. Netmask : Enter the subnet mask of y our network . […]

  • Page 97: D-Link DNS-327L

    92 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 7: Click the C onnect button to map a selected V olume from the list.[…]

  • Page 98: D-Link DNS-327L

    93 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 8: The login window appears. Select Guest or Registered U ser . Step 9: Enter a username and passw ord for the DNS-327L and click C onnect .[…]

  • Page 99: D-Link DNS-327L

    94 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 10: Y ou will see a pop-up window that will say you suc cessfully mapped a drive . Click OK to con tinue. Note: Use the Disconnect button on the D-Link Storage Utility to unmap drive(s). Step 11: Y ou should now be able to open the DNS-327L in the F inder , under the SHARED heading […]

  • Page 100: D-Link DNS-327L

    95 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 2 — Getting Star ted Step 12: Click the About button a t the he bottom of the D-Link Storage Utility to see the software version.[…]

  • Page 101: D-Link DNS-327L

    96 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Note: The comput er you use to acc ess the web-based conguration manager m ust be on the same subnet as the DNS-327L. I f your network is using a DHCP ser ver and the comput er receives IP settings from the DHCP , the device will automatic ally be in the same subnet. T o access the W e[…]

  • Page 102: D-Link DNS-327L

    97 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will see the Home tab in the upper left corner . The Applications and Management tabs ar e directly to the right of it. Home[…]

  • Page 103: D-Link DNS-327L

    98 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Applica tions The Applications page c ontains icons for FTP/HT TP D ownloads, Remot e Backups, L ocal Backups , P2P Downloads, My F iles, and Amazon S3 . Click on each icon to view the submenus . Y ou can also nd the applications that you hav e installed using the Setup Wizard .[…]

  • Page 104: D-Link DNS-327L

    99 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Management The Management page contains ic ons for the Setup Wizard , Disk Management, Acc ount Management, Network Management, Application Management, S ystem Management, and System Status . Click on each icon t o view the submenus.[…]

  • Page 105: D-Link DNS-327L

    100 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Setup W izard ( W eb UI) The DNS-327L has a Setup Wizard that allow s you to quickly congure some of the basic device settings . Click the Setup Wizard ic on to open it. Step 1 — Click the Run W izard button t o star t the Setup Wizard . Step 2 — Click Nex t to continue.[…]

  • Page 106: D-Link DNS-327L

    101 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Y ou may change the admin acc ount password her e and conrm the password , or leave it blank. Click Nex t to continue . Step 4 — Select from the drop-down menu the correct time zone for your loca tion. Click Nex t to continue or click Skip to ignore this step .[…]

  • Page 107: D-Link DNS-327L

    102 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — Select DHCP Client to obtain IP settings automatically fr om a DHCP ser ver (rout er) or Static IP to assign the par ameters below manually . IP Addr ess: Enter an IP address f or the DNS-327L. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask of your network. Gatewa y IP Addr ess: Enter the I[…]

  • Page 108: D-Link DNS-327L

    103 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 7 — Click Account and enter your E-mail inf ormation in the box es provided , in order to r eceive status inf ormation about your DNS-327L . Click T est E-Mail to verify y our settings are correct. Click Nex t to continue or click Skip to ignore this step . Step 8 — Y ou can select […]

  • Page 109: D-Link DNS-327L

    104 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 9 — Y ou can click Pr evious to check your settings and make an y necessar y changes. If you ar e satised with your settings, click the F inish button t o save your settings and complet e the wizard. Click Exit to end the wizar d without saving the settings.[…]

  • Page 110: D-Link DNS-327L

    105 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Disk Management Hard Driv e Congur ation T o setup the Hard Drive RAID conguration of your DNS-327L, click on the Management tab and then the Disk Management icon. Select Hard Drive Congur ation from the list that appears belo w Disk Management . This page will allow y ou to set[…]

  • Page 111: D-Link DNS-327L

    106 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Hard Driv e Congur ation Wizar d The Hard Drive Congur ation page displays the Current RAID T yp e . Click Set RAID T ype and Re -F ormat. When you select Management > Disk Management > Har d Drive C onguration , and clik on Set RAID type and Re -F ormat , you will start t[…]

  • Page 112: D-Link DNS-327L

    107 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Physical Disk Information page displa ys information about the har d drives on your DNS-327L. It shows the Disk number , V endor , Model, Serial Number , and Size . Click Nex t to continue . Select the format by clicking on the preferred RAID type . (Selec ted type will be highlighte[…]

  • Page 113: D-Link DNS-327L

    108 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation V olume Encr yption gives y ou the option to encr ypt one or both drives to keep them safe fr om hackers. Select the V olume(s) you would like to encrypt by check ing in the box next to it. Click Nex t to continue. A s you proceed thr ough the wizard, y ou can click on Pre vious to edit […]

  • Page 114: D-Link DNS-327L

    109 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Volume Configur ation Summar y , shows a summary of your conguration selections. The V olume Name , the RAID Ty p e , the File Sy stem used, the disk Siz e , and the Disk array number are display ed. Check marks at the beginning of each ro w indicate whether or not you enabled Enc[…]

  • Page 115: D-Link DNS-327L

    110 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A warning message will appear to inform y ou that all data will erased when the hard drive(s) is r e -formatted. Click Ye s to continue, or click No to exit. If you clicked on Ye s , par titioning will begin. Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not turn o your NAS.[…]

  • Page 116: D-Link DNS-327L

    111 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Next the formatting process will beg in. A progr ess bar will show the percentage f ormatted. Do not turn o your NAS during this pr ocess. If you would like to change y our settings at this stage, click Exit . Next the system updates . Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not[…]

  • Page 117: D-Link DNS-327L

    112 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Setup is now complete . This scr een shows the V olume Name(s) , File Sy stem used, the RAID Mode , and the Disk array number . Click Finish t o complete the proc ess. If you chose to encrypt one or both dr ives, y ou can conrm encr yption by navigating t o Management > Disk Manage[…]

  • Page 118: D-Link DNS-327L

    113 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the V olume and click SA VE . This will save the encryption key on your local hard driv e for future r eferenc e. Save the le t o your local hard drive . Depending on your bro wser , click OK to sav e[…]

  • Page 119: D-Link DNS-327L

    114 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation JBOD Select a R AID T ype JBOD in order to cr eate a single volume fr om all of the drives. Click Nex t to continue . V olume Encr yption gives y ou the option to encr ypt the drive to keep it safe fr om hackers. Check the box under Encryption . Click Nex t to continue. A s you proc eed […]

  • Page 120: D-Link DNS-327L

    115 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A warning message appears indicating that selection of this option could result in a slow down in access speed . Click Ye s to continue. Setup a password f or the encr ypted drive. En ter a passw ord and re- enter the same passwor d to verify . Check the box b y Auto Mount if y ou want t[…]

  • Page 121: D-Link DNS-327L

    116 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you do not enter a passwor d in the eld provided , a message will prompt you to do so . Click Ye s to enter a P assword . Click Nex t to continue . The Volume Configur ation Summar y , shows a summary of your conguration selections. The V olume Name , the RAID Ty p e , the File […]

  • Page 122: D-Link DNS-327L

    117 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A warning message will appear to inform y ou that all data will erased when the hard drive(s) is r e -formatted. Click Ye s to continue, or click No to exit. If you clicked on Ye s , par titioning will begin. Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not turn o your NAS.[…]

  • Page 123: D-Link DNS-327L

    118 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Next the formatting process will beg in. A progr ess bar will show the percentage f ormatted. Do not turn o your NAS during this pr ocess. If you would like to change y our settings at this stage, click Exit . Next the system updates . Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not[…]

  • Page 124: D-Link DNS-327L

    119 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Setup is now complete . This screen sho ws the V olume Name , File S ystem used, the RAID Mode , and the Disk array number . Click Finish t o complete the proc ess.[…]

  • Page 125: D-Link DNS-327L

    120 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation RAID 0 Select a R AID T ype RAID 0 (t wo drives ar e striped into one volume). Click Nex t to continue . RAID Size Settings allows you to tweak the siz e of the RAID 0 V olume. Use the slider to change the RAID size or ent er a number in the eld provided. Check the box b y the words ,[…]

  • Page 126: D-Link DNS-327L

    121 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation V olume Encr yption gives y ou the option to encr ypt one or both drives to keep them safe fr om hackers. Select the V olume you would like to encrypt by checking in the box next to it. Click Nex t to continue. A s you proc eed through the wizard, y ou can click on Previous t o edit any […]

  • Page 127: D-Link DNS-327L

    122 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Setup a password f or the encr ypted drive. Ent er a password and r e — enter the same passwor d to verify . Check the box b y Auto Mount if y ou want the encr ypted drive to be automatically mounted without en tering a password every time you boot up . Click Nex t to continue . If you d[…]

  • Page 128: D-Link DNS-327L

    123 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Volume Configur ation Summar y , shows a summary of your conguration selections. The V olume Name , the RAID Ty p e , the File Sy stem used, the disk Siz e , and the Disk ar ray number are displayed . Check marks at the beginning of the ro w indicate you enabled Encryption and/or […]

  • Page 129: D-Link DNS-327L

    124 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you clicked on Ye s , par titioning will begin. Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not turn o your NAS. Next the formatting process will beg in. A progress bar will sho w the percentage f ormatted. Do not turn o your NAS during this pr ocess. If you would like to chan[…]

  • Page 130: D-Link DNS-327L

    125 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Next the system updates . Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not turn o your NAS. Setup is now complete . This screen sho ws the V olume Name(s ), Fi le Sy stem used, the RAID Mode , and the Disk number . Click Finish t o complete the proc ess.[…]

  • Page 131: D-Link DNS-327L

    126 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation RAID 1 Select a R AID T ype RAID 1 (copies one disk and produces a mirror ed copy of the other .) Click Nex t to continue . RAID Size Settings allows you to tweak the siz e of the RAID 1 V olume. Use the slider to change the RAID size or ent er a number in the eld provided . Check the[…]

  • Page 132: D-Link DNS-327L

    127 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click Enable Aut o -Rebuild to automatically r ebuild a failed drive if it has been replaced with a new one . Select Disable Auto-Rebuild if you w ant to star t the rebuild pr ocess manually after replacing a failed drive . Click Nex t to continue . V olume Encr yption giv es you the opt[…]

  • Page 133: D-Link DNS-327L

    128 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A warning message appears indicating that selection of this option could result in a slow down in access speed . Click Ye s to continue. Setup a password f or the encr ypted drive. Ent er a password and r e — enter the same passwor d to verify . Check the box by A uto Mount if you want t[…]

  • Page 134: D-Link DNS-327L

    129 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you do not enter a passwor d in the eld provided , a message will prompt you to do so . Click Ye s to enter a P assword . Click Nex t to continue . The Volume Configur ation Summar y , shows a summary of your conguration selections. The V olume Name , the RAID Ty p e , the File […]

  • Page 135: D-Link DNS-327L

    130 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you clicked on Ye s , par titioning will begin. Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not turn o your NAS. Next the formatting process will beg in. A progr ess bar will show the percentage f ormatted. Do not turn o your NAS during this pr ocess. If you would like to chan[…]

  • Page 136: D-Link DNS-327L

    131 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Next the system updates . Y ou must be patient during this process . Do not turn o your NAS. Setup is now complete . This scr een shows the V olume Name(s) , File Sy stem used, the RAID Mode , and the Disk array number . Click Finish t o complete the proc ess.[…]

  • Page 137: D-Link DNS-327L

    132 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Upgrade fr om Standard Mode to RAID 1 Standard Mode does not o er redundancy . This lack of mirroring means that if one driv e fails, all the data on the volume will be lost. It is recommended that you upgr ade from Standard Mode to RAID 1 because this ensures tha t your data is prot […]

  • Page 138: D-Link DNS-327L

    133 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Go to Management > D isk Management > Hard Driv e Congur ation . Y ou will see two options after you add a new drive: 1. Set RAID T ype and Re -F ormat 2. F ormat the new driv e as Standard type If you select the rst option, Set R AID T ype and Re -F ormat , the Hard[…]

  • Page 139: D-Link DNS-327L

    134 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 4 — Under Physical Disk Information , you will be able t o see information about the drive you just installed . The screen sho ws Slot location, V endor , Model number , S erial Number , and disk Size . Check the checkbox that gives y ou the option to Recongur e to RAID 1 . Click[…]

  • Page 140: D-Link DNS-327L

    135 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 6 — A warning message will appear to inf orm you that all data will erased when the hard driv e is re -formatted . Click Ye s to continue, or click No to exit. Step 7 — If you click Ye s , you will see a warning message while the software communicates with the har dware to build a l[…]

  • Page 141: D-Link DNS-327L

    136 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 8 — Next the formatti ng process will beg in. A progr ess bar will show the percen tage formatted. Do not turn o y our NAS during this process. If you would like to change y our settings at this stage, click Exit . Step 9 — Next the system updat es. Y ou must be patient during th[…]

  • Page 142: D-Link DNS-327L

    137 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 10- Setup is complete . This scr een shows you nal inf ormation for the Slot , V endor , M odel number , and S erial Number . Click Finish t o complete the proc ess.[…]

  • Page 143: D-Link DNS-327L

    138 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation S.M.A.R.T . T est Click Management > Disk Management > S.M.A.R.T . T est . T o run the S.M.A.R. T T est , check the box by the hard drive y ou would like to test . Select T est T yp e of Quick T est or Ex tended T est . The Quick T est usually takes less than 10 minutes. This test […]

  • Page 144: D-Link DNS-327L

    139 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When the test is complet e, the results will be display ed in the Result column, on the right side of the screen. When the S.M.A.R. T . T est begins , you will notice the scr een now includes a column for P rogress and Result . A percen tage completed will display under the Progress head[…]

  • Page 145: D-Link DNS-327L

    140 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea ting a Schedule T o create a schedule, rst select the disks/volumes t o run the test on. Under Schedule , selec t the period ( Day of W eek , W eek ly , or Monthly ) and then select the Time fr om the drop- down menu. Click Create . T o view the S chedule List , click on the turq[…]

  • Page 146: D-Link DNS-327L

    141 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Scan Disk Scan Disk provides a method t o test the disk ’ s le system on y our DNS-327L . S can Disk scans your disk’ s le system f or errors and/or corruption. Click Management > Disk Management > Scan Disk . Select the V olume(s) you wish to sca n from the drop-down lis[…]

  • Page 147: D-Link DNS-327L

    142 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A warning message will prompt you t o stop all network activit y and avoid accessing data on the har d drive befor e star ting Scan Disk . Click Ye s to proceed or No to cancel . The DNS-327L will initialize the volume(s) and beg in scanning. Please wait while the software scans the volu[…]

  • Page 148: D-Link DNS-327L

    143 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation V olume Encr yption Click Management > Disk Management > V olume Encr yption. If you created an encrypted volume using the Setup Wizard , you will see it listed below the Modify button. If you would like to modify the encrypted data, click the V olume Name you wish to modify . The […]

  • Page 149: D-Link DNS-327L

    144 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T o change the settings on an encr ypted volume , you need to enter the Original P assword in the eld pr ovided. Y ou can click the radio button by Upload Encryped Key F ile and then the Brow se to locate an encrypted key le. Click Nex t to continue . Select key le to upload.[…]

  • Page 150: D-Link DNS-327L

    145 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Check the Auto Moun t check box to ha ve the system mount the V olume automatically . Enter a New P assword , and ent er once again to verify the passw ord. Click Apply to con tinue. W ait while the drive is being encrypted.[…]

  • Page 151: D-Link DNS-327L

    146 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click Exit t o close the wizard and return to the V olume Encr yption page. Alt ernatively , you can click Do wnload Encr ypted Ke y File . Y ou have the option to open or sav e the le. With Sav e File selected, click OK to sav e. Note: Using V olume Encryption will slow down the spee[…]

  • Page 152: D-Link DNS-327L

    147 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A ccoun t Management Users/Gr oups The Users/Groups page is for cr eating and managing user and gr oup accounts. Up t o 256 users and 32 groups can be crea ted. By default, all users have r ead and write access to all f olders. How ever , access rules can be creat ed and changed on the N[…]

  • Page 153: D-Link DNS-327L

    148 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 1 — Select Create A Ne w User Ac count , and then click Nex t to continue . Step 2 — Enter the U ser Name and Passw ord, and then click Next to continue .[…]

  • Page 154: D-Link DNS-327L

    149 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — If you already crea ted a group or gr oups, you will ha ve the following option: A dd the User to a Group by checking the Group checkbox. If you have not cr eated a gr oup or groups, y ou will see the screen that sa ys, No Group(s) hav e been added to this NAS . Click Nex t to c[…]

  • Page 155: D-Link DNS-327L

    150 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under Assign Privileges — A ccess Methods you can s elect either FTP or W ebD A V . ( CIFS and AFP are set by default.) • CIFS is f or Common Internet F ile Syst em. • AFP is f or Apple F iling Pr otocol. • FTP is f or F ile T ransfer Pr otocol. • W ebDA V is for Web-based Distri[…]

  • Page 156: D-Link DNS-327L

    151 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — Ent er the amount of disk space you wish to assig n the user on each volume . Enter 0 if you would like t o provide unlimited disk space to the user . Click N ex t to continue. Step 6 — Review the Summar y of your settings. Click F inish to accept the settings , Previous t o go […]

  • Page 157: D-Link DNS-327L

    152 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea ting Multiple Users Step 1 — T o create an account f or multiple users, select C reate Multiple Users and then click Next to continue. Step 2 — Enter the following: • Username Prex is the rst part of the account name for the Multiple User List . • Acc ount Prex is f or […]

  • Page 158: D-Link DNS-327L

    153 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — If you already cr eated a gr oup or groups, y ou will have the following option: A dd the User to a Group by checking the Group checkbox. If you have not cr eated a gr oup or groups, y ou will see the screen that sa ys, No Group(s) hav e been added to this NAS . Click Nex t to c[…]

  • Page 159: D-Link DNS-327L

    154 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under Assign Privileges — Ac cess Methods s elect FTP . CIFS is set by default. • CIFS is f or Common Internet F ile Syst em. • FTP is f or F ile T ransfer Pr otocol. Click Nex t to continue . Step 5 — Enter the amount of disk space you wish to assig n the users on each volume . Ente[…]

  • Page 160: D-Link DNS-327L

    155 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 6 — Review the Summar y of your settings. Click F inish to accept the settings , Previous t o go back and make changes, or click Exit to canc el the changes. Under User Settings you will see User Names for the users crea ted.[…]

  • Page 161: D-Link DNS-327L

    156 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Modify Users Step 1 — Under User Settings , click the name of the user you wish to modify . The selected User Name will be in red . Click Modify to continue . Step 2 — This star ts the User Setup Wizard . Click Nex t to continue .[…]

  • Page 162: D-Link DNS-327L

    157 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Y ou can change the User Name or P asswor d . Click Nex t to continue . Step 4 — Y ou can change the Network Share Settings . Click Nex t to continue .[…]

  • Page 163: D-Link DNS-327L

    158 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 6 — Y ou can re -assign the amount of disk space f or the user on each volume . Enter 0 to pro vide unlimited disk space to the user . Click Nex t to continue . Step 5 — F or changes to Assign P rivileges — Access Methods , you can select either FTP or W ebDA V . ( CIFS and AFP are […]

  • Page 164: D-Link DNS-327L

    159 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 7 — Review the Summary of your settings. Click F inish to accept the settings , Previous t o go back and make changes, or click Exit to cancel the changes . Step 8 — Y ou will see a message that says the user changes w ere successful . Click Ye s to exit the wizard .[…]

  • Page 165: D-Link DNS-327L

    160 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Deleting Users Step 1 — Under User Settings , click the name of the user you wish to delete . The selected User Name will be in r ed. Click Delete . Step 2 — Y ou will see a message prompting you to conrm deletion of the user . Click Ye s to conrm. The user is remo ved from the lis[…]

  • Page 166: D-Link DNS-327L

    161 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Impor ting Users Step 1 — Naviga te to Management > Ac count Management > Users/Groups . Under User Settings , click on Import Users . Step 2 — The Impor t Users Setup Wizard will star t. Click Nex t to continue .[…]

  • Page 167: D-Link DNS-327L

    162 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Click Download t o see a sample le. (import_le.txt) Required F ormat: user name/user passwor d/user groups/shared folder(rw)/shared folder(r o)/shared folder(den y)/user quota Example: sta3/sta3/Group_Sta2/F older_R W1///100 Note: Y ou must create the user gr oups[…]

  • Page 168: D-Link DNS-327L

    163 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — The Summar y will show a list of the impor ted users. If there are pr oblems with the user list, errors will be in red . Click Pre vious go back to change the impor ted le. Y ou can click the “ i ” button to view the details f or each user . The Details include User Name […]

  • Page 169: D-Link DNS-327L

    164 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea ting a Group Step 1 — Naviga te to Management > Acc ount Management > Users/Groups . Click the turquoise arro w next to Group Settings and settings window will appear . Click New to create a new gr oup. Step 2 — The Group Setup Wizard will start. Click N ex t to continue.[…]

  • Page 170: D-Link DNS-327L

    165 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Enter a Gr oup Name . Click Nex t to continue. Step 4 — Click the checkbox by the user(s) y ou want to add to the group and then click Next to continue.[…]

  • Page 171: D-Link DNS-327L

    166 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — Select the Network Share Settings for the group . Check the box belo w Read Only , Read/Write , or Den y Ac cess for the corresponding v olume. Click Nex t to continue . Step 6 — Under Assign Privileges — Acc ess Methods you can select FTP and W ebD A V . Both CIFS and AFP are s[…]

  • Page 172: D-Link DNS-327L

    167 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 7 — If you checked the bo x by W ebDav , check the box for Read Only or Read/W rite permission for the volume(s) the g roup can have W ebDA V access to . Click Nex t to continue . Step 8 — Enter the amoun t of hard drive space y ou want to assign to the gr oup for each v olume. Ent […]

  • Page 173: D-Link DNS-327L

    168 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 9 — The wizard is complete . Review the Summar y of your settings. Click F inish to accept the settings , Previous t o go back and make changes, or click Exit to canc el the changes. Step 10 — When y ou exit the Group Setup Wizard , you will see the table under Group Settings contai[…]

  • Page 174: D-Link DNS-327L

    169 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Modifying a Group Step 1 — Naviga te to Management > Ac count Management > Users/Groups . Click the turquoise arro w next to Group Settings and the Group Settings table will appear below . Step 2 — Select the Group Name for the gr oup you want to modify . The ro w for the selected […]

  • Page 175: D-Link DNS-327L

    170 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — The Group Setup Wizard will start. Click N ex t to continue. Step 4 — Check the bo xes by the U ser Name(s) to add users to the group , or uncheck to r emove users . Click Nex t to continue.[…]

  • Page 176: D-Link DNS-327L

    171 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — The Net work Share Settings allow you t o change permissions for the f or the group . Check the box es below Read Only , Read/Write , or Den y Ac cess for the c orresponding volume. Click Nex t to continue . Step 6 — Under Assign Privileges — Acc ess Methods you can select or un[…]

  • Page 177: D-Link DNS-327L

    172 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 7 — If you checked the bo x by W ebDav , check the box for Read Only or Read/W rite permission for the volume(s) the g roup can have W ebDA V access to . Click Nex t to continue . Step 8 — Y ou can edit the amount of space you w ant to assign to the group f or each volume . Y ou can[…]

  • Page 178: D-Link DNS-327L

    173 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 9 — Y ou will see a warning message if you attempt t o assign a quota that is smaller than the quota on the user ’ s account. Click Ye s to go back to Quota S ettings and change the quota. Step 10 — The wizard is complete . Review the Summar y of your settings. Click F inish to ac[…]

  • Page 179: D-Link DNS-327L

    174 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Deleting a Group Step 1 — Under Group Settings, select the Group Name y ou want to remo ve. The selected Group Name and User Names will be red . Click Delete . Step 2 — A warning message will appear asking you to verify that you want t o delete the group . Click Ye s to delete the Group […]

  • Page 180: D-Link DNS-327L

    175 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Quotas The DNS-327L allows st orage quotas to be set for both gr oups and individuals. By default, users and gr oups do not have a quota. Assig n a quota to a group or user t o limit the amount of storage permitted. Click Management > A cc ount Management and then Quotas on the left s[…]

  • Page 181: D-Link DNS-327L

    176 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the user whose quota you would like to modify . Y our selection will turn red. Click Modify to change the user ’ s settings. The Quota S ettings screen will display the selected user accoun t. Enter a new quota amount f or each volume. En ter 0 to assign an unlimited quota. Clic[…]

  • Page 182: D-Link DNS-327L

    177 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The modied quota settings f or the user will be displayed in the table under User Quota Settings . T o locate a group and view quota settings, click the tur quoise arrow by Group Quota Settings. Y ou will see the group quota table .[…]

  • Page 183: D-Link DNS-327L

    178 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the group whose quota you would like t o modify . Y our selection will turn red. Click Modify . The Quota Settings screen will display the selected Group Name . Enter a new quota amount f or each volume for the g roup and click Apply .[…]

  • Page 184: D-Link DNS-327L

    179 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The modied quota settings will be display ed in the Group Quota Settings table.[…]

  • Page 185: D-Link DNS-327L

    180 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Network Shares page allows the user to c ongure shared f olders and assign rights to specic users and groups , using the Network Shares Setup Wizard . (Ref er to page 181.) Y ou can also mount .iso les in the ISO Mount Shares settings . When a user has access to a moun ted .[…]

  • Page 186: D-Link DNS-327L

    181 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Add/Modify Network S hares Wizar d The follo wing section will descr ibe how to add and congur e Network Shares on the DNS-327L. Go to Management > Ac count Management > Network Shar es . Step 1 — Click on the New button to launch the wizar d. Using the Network Shares Setup Wiza[…]

  • Page 187: D-Link DNS-327L

    182 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Select All Ac counts to allo w access to this f older from all of the user accounts . Selec t Specic User/Group to only allo w certain users or groups access to this f older . Click Nex t to continue . Step 4 — If you selected All A ccounts abo ve, Assign A ccess Rights for a[…]

  • Page 188: D-Link DNS-327L

    183 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — If you selected Specic User/Group in Step 3 , then this step allows y ou to set the access rights f or each individual user account on the DNS-327L . Click Nex t to continue . Step 6 — If you selected Specic user/Group in Step 3 , then this step allows y ou to set the acce[…]

  • Page 189: D-Link DNS-327L

    184 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 7 — Here y ou can assign Network Share Settings . Oplocks (Opportunistic locks) are guarantees made by a server for a shared logical v olume. These guarantees inform the Client tha t a le ’ s content will not be allo wed to be changed by the server . If some change is imminent,[…]

  • Page 190: D-Link DNS-327L

    185 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 9 — If you checked FTP in Step 8 you can congur e the FTP settings for this shar e. Choose from the f ollowing: 1) FTP Anon ymous None (No Access). 2) FTP Anon ymous Read Only (Limited Access). 3) FTP Anon ymous Read/Writ e (F ull Acc ess). Click Nex t to continue . If you checke[…]

  • Page 191: D-Link DNS-327L

    186 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you checked W ebD A V in step 8 as an access method to y our network share, then this st ep allows you t o selec t W ebDav S ettings. Choose from the f ollowing: Read Only or Read/Write . Click Nex t to continue . Step 10 — Review the summary of your settings. Click Finish to sa ve yo[…]

  • Page 192: D-Link DNS-327L

    187 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Deleting a Network Shar e Go to Management > Ac count Management > Network Shar es . Under Network Share Settings , select the Network Share you wish to delete . Y our selection will tur n red. Click Delete to remov e the share . A warning message will appear requesting that y ou v[…]

  • Page 193: D-Link DNS-327L

    188 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you clicked Ye s , the deleted Share will be gone from the list.[…]

  • Page 194: D-Link DNS-327L

    189 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Resetting the Network Shares Click the Reset Network Shar es button. A warning message will remind y ou that if you reset, no passw ord is required by default. Click Ye s to conrm your selection, or No to cancel . Go to Management > A ccount Managemen t > Network Shar es .[…]

  • Page 195: D-Link DNS-327L

    190 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation ISO Shares Setup Wizar d Y ou can create an ISO image that is an ar chive le of a group of les on y our NAS (Refer to page 195). Mounting the ISO image crea tes a vir tual CD/DVD drive. The follo wing sec tion describes how to add a new ISO mount on the DNS-327L. This will launch t[…]

  • Page 196: D-Link DNS-327L

    191 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Assign acc ess rights: • Selec t All A ccoun ts to assign the ISO mount shar ed folder access rights to all users . • Selec t Specic User/Group in or der to assign the ISO mount shared f older access rights to individual users or to specic groups of users . Click Nex t to conti[…]

  • Page 197: D-Link DNS-327L

    192 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can add a comment that describes the ISO Mount Share. Click Nex t to continue . If you selected All Ac counts in the previous st ep, the ne x t step is to assign Read Only access , or you can Den y Ac cess privileges to the selected ISO mount shared f older . Click the radio button […]

  • Page 198: D-Link DNS-327L

    193 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Review the summar y of the share settings. Click on the F inish button to save the settings , click Pre vious to go back and make changes, or Exit to canc el the changes. When you click F inish , you ha ve completed the wizar d. Under Assign Privileges — Acc ess Methods you can choose fr[…]

  • Page 199: D-Link DNS-327L

    194 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Using the D-Link Storage Utility , the ISO mount share can be mapped to your c omputer as a normal network share. (Refer t o page 87 for mor e information about the D-Link storage Utility .)[…]

  • Page 200: D-Link DNS-327L

    195 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea ting an ISO Image Y ou can create an ISO image that is an ar chive le of a group of les on y our NAS. The f ollowing section will describe how to create an ISO image from your NAS and e xpor t the ISO le to your PC. Click Accou nt Management > Network Shar es > ISO Mo[…]

  • Page 201: D-Link DNS-327L

    196 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the I mage Size based on how y ou intend to use it: • CDROM (650MB/74MIN) — ISO le size for burning ont o a CDROM. • DVD5 (4.7GB) — ISO le size for burning ont o a single -layer DVD . • DVD9 (8.5GB) — ISO le size f or burning onto a double -layer DVD . Select the I […]

  • Page 202: D-Link DNS-327L

    197 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the V olume to save it there , or click New to create a new director y and click OK . Enter an Image Name for the ISO le . Click Nex t .[…]

  • Page 203: D-Link DNS-327L

    198 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will see a warning message that says you ar e about to create an ISO image that cannot be modied. Click Ye s to continue or No to cancel. On the left side of the ISO Image T ree Editing window y ou can select the option to Overwrite an existing ISO le or Skip it. Y ou will als[…]

  • Page 204: D-Link DNS-327L

    199 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation On the right side of the window you will see the t otal available space of the ISO le and the space curren tly being used. At the bottom of the windo w , you will see a eld that sa ys Select Path . This is the path that is used when y ou would like to to r emove a le or folder f[…]

  • Page 205: D-Link DNS-327L

    200 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation V erifying the ISO image Open W indow s Explorer , click the Network icon, double — click your DNS-327L . Double — click the icon for the volume wher e you sav ed the ISO . Y ou should see the ISO image le.[…]

  • Page 206: D-Link DNS-327L

    201 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Admin P assword Enter the f ollowing under Administr ator Settings: 1. Enter a new U ser Name . 2. T ype the current Passw ord . 3. Enter a New P asswor d . 4. C onrm Passw ord by typing the new password again. Click Sav e Settings to apply the changes, or Don ’ t Save Settings to c[…]

  • Page 207: D-Link DNS-327L

    202 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Network Management Network Management manages all aspects of LAN settings. Even if y our LAN settings were initially congur ed in the installation Setup Wizard , they can be recongur ed here, using the LAN Setup Wizard . Go to Management > Network Managemen t and then LAN S etup[…]

  • Page 208: D-Link DNS-327L

    203 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The LAN Setup Wizard provides st ep -by-step instructions on how to congur e the IP settings. Click Nex t to continue . Step one allow s you to congur e your LAN IP Settings. Here you can choose between DHCP Client or Sta tic IP . If you selec t Static IP , you will have to manuall[…]

  • Page 209: D-Link DNS-327L

    204 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Review the Summar y of your settings. Click on the F inish button to sav e the settings, click Pre vious to go back and make changes, or Exit t o cancel the changes. When you click on F inish , the LAN Setup Wizard is complete.[…]

  • Page 210: D-Link DNS-327L

    205 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation IPv6 Setup Go to Management > Network Managemen t > LAN S etup . Under IPv6 S ettings click Setup . An IP v6 Setup window will appear .[…]

  • Page 211: D-Link DNS-327L

    206 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under IP v6 Setup , there are f our connection modes to selec t from: Auto , DHCP , Static and O . • Auto — Requests inf ormation from an IPv6-enabled router and automatically congur es your settings. • DHCP — Requests information from a DHCP server . • Static — Y ou must ent[…]

  • Page 212: D-Link DNS-327L

    207 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Below IPv6 S ettings, you should see y our settings in the table.[…]

  • Page 213: D-Link DNS-327L

    208 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Link Speed and LL TD Settings Select either Auto ( Auto-Negotiate) , 100Mbps , or 1000Mbps from the drop-down menu. Click the Sav e Settings button to sav e the Link Speed settings. This device supports LL TD (Link Layer T opology Discovery) and is used by the Network Map application tha[…]

  • Page 214: D-Link DNS-327L

    209 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation DDNS The DDNS fea ture allows y ou to host a ser ver ( Web , FTP , Game S er ver , etc.) using a domain name that y ou can purchase (www.wha teveryournameis. com) with your dynamically assig ned IP address. Most broadband Internet Service Providers assig n dynamic (changing) IP addresses[…]

  • Page 215: D-Link DNS-327L

    210 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation P or t F or warding The DNS-327L suppor ts Universal Plug and Pla y (UPnP) P or t F or warding , which congures port forwarding automatically on your UP nP-enabled router . Note: Y ou must have a UPnP router on y our network. Log in and click Management > Network Management > P […]

  • Page 216: D-Link DNS-327L

    211 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A message will pop-up when the UPnP router has been loca ted on the network. Click Ye s . Note: Y ou must enable UPnP on your router . Click the turquoise arro w next to Port Forwarding t o see the Port F or warding options .[…]

  • Page 217: D-Link DNS-327L

    212 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click Add to proceed . This launches the P or t Forwar ding Settings Wizard. Click Nex t to continue .[…]

  • Page 218: D-Link DNS-327L

    213 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click Selec t default ser vice scan to select the por t for warding ser vices from a list, or select C ustom a por t forwarding service to manually congur e your own settings. Click Nex t to continue . If you chose Selec t default service scan , check the box by the Ser vice to be use[…]

  • Page 219: D-Link DNS-327L

    214 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation FTP Ser ver The Application Management section allows y ou to congure multiple services for your DNS-327L. The ser ver and ser vice settings include: FTP S er ver , Add-Ons, AFP Ser vice, NFS Ser vice , and Multimedia Ser vices . Let’ s begin by looking at conguration options for[…]

  • Page 220: D-Link DNS-327L

    215 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Block IP List Below the FTP Ser ver Settings section, you will see a turquiose arrow by the heading , Block IP List. This feature allo ws you to block IP addr ess that you consider threat ening to your network. Click the turquoise arrow t o open the conguration table. Click the turquo[…]

  • Page 221: D-Link DNS-327L

    216 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you selected T emporary , then selec t a time frame and click Apply to con tinue. The Blocked IP List will display any IP addr ess(es) that have been blocked, as well as some of the details , like the Block Duration and Release Date .[…]

  • Page 222: D-Link DNS-327L

    217 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click the turquoise arro w next to FTP S erver Status to review the FTP details. The FTP server is stopped by default. Click Start FTP Ser ver to run. After you click the Start FTP Ser ver button, the Status changes to Star ted.[…]

  • Page 223: D-Link DNS-327L

    218 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Now you can open y our default browser or FTP applica tion and log-in to your FTP server .[…]

  • Page 224: D-Link DNS-327L

    219 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A vailable A dd- on Ser vices Add-ons add extra ser vices to the DNS-327L. Here is a look at each Add-on ser vice available . AjaXplorer: Photo C enter: Squeeze Cent er: Blog ( W ordPress): Audio Str eamer: aMule: Joomla: phpBB: phpMyAdmin: T ransmission: AjaXplorer pr ovides an enhanced[…]

  • Page 225: D-Link DNS-327L

    220 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Enabling Add-on P ack ages from the Setup Wizar d Add-on pack ages are available fr om ww w .my dlink.com/suppor t for your DNS-327L. The list includes AjaXplorer , Audio Streamer , Blog , Photo Center , aMule, Jo omla , phpBB , phpMyAdmin , T ransmission and Squeeze Center . Installatio[…]

  • Page 226: D-Link DNS-327L

    221 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The next two screens show the add-on packages disabled.[…]

  • Page 227: D-Link DNS-327L

    222 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou may have chosen to install A dd-ons using the installation S etup Wizard . If not, you can install them later from the W eb UI. Open your default bro wser and go to Management > Application Management > A dd- Ons . The table below c ontains a list of available add-on pack ages[…]

  • Page 228: D-Link DNS-327L

    223 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou must rst download the Setup Wizard from D-Link ’ s suppor t site. Go to www .mydlink.com/support and locate the DNS-327L under the Storage tab . Within the f older for the Setup Wizard , y ou will nd a folder called Add-ons . Open the folder and navigat e to the desired add-[…]

  • Page 229: D-Link DNS-327L

    224 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation AFP Ser vice Go to Management > Application Management > AFP Ser vice. Click the Enable radio button to turn on AFP Service . Click Save Settings . Go to Management > Application Management > NFS Ser vice. Click the Enable radio button to turn on NFS Service . Click Save Sett[…]

  • Page 230: D-Link DNS-327L

    225 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Multimedia Ser vices The Multimedia Ser vices are f or creating a media library from photo , video , and audio les. Users can upload les to a desig nated Media Share f older on the DNS-327L , and Multimedia Ser vices will organize and publish the data in one library . Once these ph[…]

  • Page 231: D-Link DNS-327L

    226 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Go to Management > Application Management > Multimedia Services . Under Multimedia Shares Settings , click Add to cr eate a Shared F older .[…]

  • Page 232: D-Link DNS-327L

    227 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select a volume or a folder to designa te as the Shared F older under Multimedia Shares Settings. Click Apply . A progr ess bar will reect the progress of the initializa tion process.[…]

  • Page 233: D-Link DNS-327L

    228 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The DNS-327L builds the media library automatically . When the system has nished building the media libr ar y , you will see a success message . Click Ye s to continue.[…]

  • Page 234: D-Link DNS-327L

    229 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation UPnP A V S er ver Once the media libr ar y has been created (see page 226), go to M anagement > Application Management > Multimedia Ser vices . Below UPnP A V Ser ver Settings , click the Enable radio button. Click Save Settings to c ongure the UPnP A V share. Click Refresh to u[…]

  • Page 235: D-Link DNS-327L

    230 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation iT unes Ser ver The DNS-327L f eatures an iT unes Ser ver . This ser ver prov ides the ability to share music to computers on the local network running iT unes. If the server is enabled, the device will be aut omatically detected by the iT unes program and the music contained in the spec[…]

  • Page 236: D-Link DNS-327L

    231 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Language Users hav e the ability to customize the DNS-327L by installing whichever language(s) they pr efer . Y ou can download a language package from the D-Link website. Go to Management > S ystem Management > Language to install a new language. Click on Brow se to sear ch for th[…]

  • Page 237: D-Link DNS-327L

    232 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T ime and Date The Time and Date congura tion option allows you t o update and maintain the correct time and date on the in ternal system clock. Y ou can sync the time and date of your c omputer as the system time . Or you can select an NTP (Network Time P rotocol) Server in order to […]

  • Page 238: D-Link DNS-327L

    233 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Device Under Device Settings , you can assign a W ork group , Name and Description to the DNS-327L. Then y ou can access this device by typing the name in the URL section of your web bro wser . For example: h ttp://dlink-d10001. Go to Management > Syst em Management > Device . W or[…]

  • Page 239: D-Link DNS-327L

    234 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Sy stem Settings System Settings provid es feature s to manage your DNS-327L. Y ou can restar t your NAS, r estore the sy stem to it’ s original state , set idle times, shut down the system, and c ongure settings, like your system ’ s temperatur e threshold setting . Go to Managem[…]

  • Page 240: D-Link DNS-327L

    235 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation P ow er Management The NAS P ower Management f eature allows y ou to manage power c onsumption. Y ou can congure the drives t o shut down while power r emains constant to the devic e. The driv es will power up again when data is acc essed. Go to Management > S ystem Managemen t >[…]

  • Page 241: D-Link DNS-327L

    236 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation P ower On/O Scheduling: Y ou can power o the NAS at scheduled times f or a specic day or multiple day s of the week. By Power On/O  , click Enable to turn on this function. Schedule the Po wer On/O  func tion by checking the check box to the right of the da y(s) of the wee[…]

  • Page 242: D-Link DNS-327L

    237 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Notications E-mail Settings Login Method: Select Accou nt or Anonymous . Choosing Anon ymous means a user name and password ar e not required . Username: Enter the user name f or your E-mail account. P assword: Enter the passw ord for y our E-mail account. P or t: Enter the SMTP por t[…]

  • Page 243: D-Link DNS-327L

    238 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation SMS Settings Similar to the way alerts for system c onditions can be sent to an E-mail box, they can also be sen t to a mobile phone. SMS (Short M essage Ser vice) allows the ex change of text messages between mobile phone devices. The user must hav e an agreement with a SMS gat eway pro[…]

  • Page 244: D-Link DNS-327L

    239 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Adding an SMS Service Pro vider The SMS (Short M essage Ser vice) Setup Wizard allows you t o add an SMS Ser vice Pro vider . Y ou can star t the SMS Setup Wizard from S ystem Management > Notications . Under SMS Settings , click the Add button. (Refer to SMS Settings description o[…]

  • Page 245: D-Link DNS-327L

    240 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Ev ent Settings By check ing the box es under Event Settings, y ou can specify which ev ents will be sent as E-mail alerts and/or SMS text messages. Examples of events that can be checked to trigger alerts: “ The Administrator P asswor d has been changed, ” and “ The Firm ware has […]

  • Page 246: D-Link DNS-327L

    241 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Logs F rom the Lo g s menu, you can setup your DNS-327L to send the NAS ’ s log events to the SysL og ser ver . Y ou can also view the NAS system logs and the FTP logs here . Under Management > Sy stem Management > Logs , go to Ser ver Settings . Enable Sy slog: Check the box to […]

  • Page 247: D-Link DNS-327L

    242 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation F irmw are Upgr ade The Firm ware Upgr ade page makes it simple to upload new rmwar e releases to the NAS. Check f or new rmware on the D-Link suppor t website . If new rmwar e is available, y ou can download the le to your local c omputer . Go to Management > Syst em Mana[…]

  • Page 248: D-Link DNS-327L

    243 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation USB Devices T o enable Net work UPS to your NAS: 1. Check the box to enable the N etwork UPS . 2. Enter an IP address of the netw ork UPS master . 3. Click Save Settings to r eceive the critical power sta tus from the network UPS master . The UPS Status will display the curr ent status o[…]

  • Page 249: D-Link DNS-327L

    244 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click the turquoise arro w to reveal P rinter Information . If a USB printer is connected, you will see the name of the Manufacturer , P roduct , and Connection D etails . Click Clear Prin t Queue(s) to remov e ac tive print jobs. ( The button is gr eyed out when there are no active prin[…]

  • Page 250: D-Link DNS-327L

    245 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Sy stem S tatus The System Info screen pr ovides extensive information about the DNS-327L. LAN Information includes IP Address , Subnet Mask and Mac Address . V olume Information displays the V olume Name , Volume T ype , and T otal Hard Drive Capacity . The Resource Monitor scr een cont[…]

  • Page 251: D-Link DNS-327L

    246 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Go to Management > S ystem Sta tus > Resource Monitor . Click the turquoise arro w to reveal the r esource details . Y ou can review information about the f ollowing resourc es: • CPU • Memory • Bandwidth • Proc esses[…]

  • Page 252: D-Link DNS-327L

    247 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Home The Home tab is considered to be the cent er for all important les on your DNS-327L. Home has one main subfolder called My F older , which contains four main applications , My Photos , My Files , My Music , and My Sur veillance . The pages that follo w describe each of these apps[…]

  • Page 253: D-Link DNS-327L

    248 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Photos My Photos is an app for cr eating photo albums on the DNS-327L. Ther e is a Photo Album Wizar d to assist you with uploading photos to y our NAS. Y ou can share photos via Picasa, F acebook, Flickr and Cooliris. F rom Home , click the My Phot os icon to open the application. Th[…]

  • Page 254: D-Link DNS-327L

    249 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The second button is Upload fr om NAS . The third butt on is Edit . The fourth and last button is Refresh .[…]

  • Page 255: D-Link DNS-327L

    250 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea ting an Album Go to Home > My Photos . A new tab will appear . ( T o exit My Photos , you can click on the tab to the left to return to the Home scr een.) Click Upload from m y computer . This opens the Photo Album Wizar d . A Create Album window pops up . (Instructions for the P[…]

  • Page 256: D-Link DNS-327L

    251 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Photo Album W izard The Photo Album W izard will assist you with uploading photos fr om your computer t o the DNS-327L in order to creat e a photo album. Enter a name for the album In the Album Name eld, and then en ter a description in the Description eld. Click Nex t to continue.[…]

  • Page 257: D-Link DNS-327L

    252 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under S elect Photo , click the Bro wse button to sear ch on your computer f or your photo les . If you would like to add mor e than one photo, y ou can hold the Shift/Contr ol button on your keyboard when y ou select the les. Click the Open button to add them to the Album .[…]

  • Page 258: D-Link DNS-327L

    253 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under S elect Photo , you will see the le names of the photos y ou selec ted. Click Next to upload the photos. Y ou will see a spinning circle with a message that says , Creating an Album while the DNS-327L automatically uploads the photos t o the NAS.[…]

  • Page 259: D-Link DNS-327L

    254 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Photo Albums scr een now contains y our photo album.[…]

  • Page 260: D-Link DNS-327L

    255 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Editing Photos in an A lbum Go to Home > My Photos . Click on your P hoto Album. A Back button appears above Photo Albums , and a Select All checkbox appears below the photo album ’ s name. Click on the Edit button on the upper right corner of the scr een. Back Select All[…]

  • Page 261: D-Link DNS-327L

    256 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation After you click the Edit butt on, the buttons in the upper right corner of the screen change . When you select images to edit, gr een check marks appear on the ones that are selected. Next you can select an action for the selected images. When you ho ver over a butt on in the upper right[…]

  • Page 262: D-Link DNS-327L

    257 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the third button if you wish to Delet e the current photo from the photo album. (Refer t o page 262.) Select the four th button if you wish to shar e the current photo to P icasa . (Refer to page 263.) Select the f th button if you wish to shar e the current photo to F acebook […]

  • Page 263: D-Link DNS-327L

    258 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Selec t a Photo as a C ov er image Y ou will see the Set Cov er button in the upper right corner of your screen only if you ar e in editing mode. Y ou are asked to verify y our selec tion of this photo as the album co ver . Click Ye s to continue, or No to exit. Click Set Co ver to selec[…]

  • Page 264: D-Link DNS-327L

    259 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will see a message indicating the operation was successful . Click Ye s to continue. Y ou will see a spinning circle while the application creates the c over image.[…]

  • Page 265: D-Link DNS-327L

    260 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Selec t a Photo to Mov e Go to Home > My Photos > Photo A lbums . Click on the Photo Album you wish to select the photo from. Select the image for the photo and click Mo ve .[…]

  • Page 266: D-Link DNS-327L

    261 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Selec t Album window will open. Check the bo x by the Album Name you wish to mo ve the photo to . When you r eturn to the Photo Album , you will see that the pr eviously selected photo is no longer visible.[…]

  • Page 267: D-Link DNS-327L

    262 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Delete a Photo Click Home > My Photos > Photo Albums . Click on the P hoto Album you wish to select the photo from. Select the Photo and click Delete . The Sy stem will automatically delete the le without v erication.[…]

  • Page 268: D-Link DNS-327L

    263 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Add a P hoto to an Album on P icasa Click Home > My Photos > Photo Albums . Click on the P hoto Album you wish to select a photo from. When you select the photo you wish to shar e on Picasa , you will see a green check -mark on the selec ted image. Click S hare to Picasa .[…]

  • Page 269: D-Link DNS-327L

    264 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will see the Google log-in screen. Y ou must have a Google accoun t to upload les to P icasa . Enter your E-mail A ddress , P assword and click Sign In t o proceed. Y ou will see a message from Google requesting that you g rant access to Pic asa W eb Albums . Click Grant A ccess […]

  • Page 270: D-Link DNS-327L

    265 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you click Grant A ccess , y ou will be directed to the Shar eCent er ™ Photo Manager . Y ou can share photos to photo albums y ou already hav e in Picasa Web , or cr eate a new web album to shar e. Under Albums , select an existing album from the drop- down list and click Share . If[…]

  • Page 271: D-Link DNS-327L

    266 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Add a P hoto to an Album on F acebook Click Home > My Photos > Photo Albums . Click on the Photo Album you wish to select a photo from. When you select the photo you wish to share on F acebook , you will see a green check -mark on the selec ted image. Click S hare to F ac ebook . Y[…]

  • Page 272: D-Link DNS-327L

    267 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The next screen explains the D-Link ShareCenter ™ . Click Go to App to proceed . The D-Link ShareCenter ™ requests permission to post images on your behalf . Click Allow t o continue.[…]

  • Page 273: D-Link DNS-327L

    268 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If you selected Allow , you will be dir ected to the ShareCen ter ™ Photo Manager . Y ou can selec t an album you already hav e in F acebook, or create a new web album to shar e. If you want to shar e a new album, click on Create Album , enter Album Name, and click Shar e . If you clic[…]

  • Page 274: D-Link DNS-327L

    269 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Share a Phot o on Flickr Click Home > My Photos > Photo Albums . Click on the Photo Album you wish to select a photo from. When you select the photo you wish t o share on Flickr , you will see a green check -mark on the selec ted image. Click S hare to Flickr . Y ou will see a wind[…]

  • Page 275: D-Link DNS-327L

    270 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Creat e a Flickr screen name . Y ou will see a message that says, D-Link ShareCenter ™ wants to link to your F lickr account . Click OK, I’LL A UTHORIZE IT to proceed .[…]

  • Page 276: D-Link DNS-327L

    271 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select your les and upload to Flickr .[…]

  • Page 277: D-Link DNS-327L

    272 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Deleting an Album F rom the Photo Albums scr een, when in the editing mode, you will see just two buttons in the upper right corner of y our screen. Click Delete to delete a Photo Album . If you neglected to select an album, you will be prompted to select one item . Click Ye s to continu[…]

  • Page 278: D-Link DNS-327L

    273 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When you select the image for the P hoto Album you wish to r emove, y ou will see a green check -mark on the selec ted le. Click Delet e . Y ou will see warning message, Are you sure y ou want to delete this album? Click Ye s to continue, or click No to exit. The deleted Phot o Album […]

  • Page 279: D-Link DNS-327L

    274 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Refreshing the Album Da tabase Click on Home > My Photos > Photo Albums . Click Refresh to r efresh the entire database . Y ou will be prompted to verify y our decision to refresh the da tabase. Click Ye s to continue, or No to exit. Y ou will see a spinning circle while the applic[…]

  • Page 280: D-Link DNS-327L

    275 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Managing Photos Y ou can access all your photos on the DNS-327L from H ome > My Photos . F ive buttons appear in the upper right corner f or managing photos: Upload from my c omputer , Upload from NAS, Edit, S lideshow , and Cooliris .[…]

  • Page 281: D-Link DNS-327L

    276 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Slideshow T oolbar includes: Play button : Photo Information: Galler y Speed Slider : GPS Information: Cooliris link : EXIF : Rotation button : Galler y Navigation : Slideshow T oolbar Click the Play button t o play the galler y images. Photo Information displa ys the image name and […]

  • Page 282: D-Link DNS-327L

    277 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation This button pla ys the Slideshow . This slider adjusts the speed of the Slideshow . This button beams y our Slideshow to a local device or to a T V via AirPlay-enabled device.[…]

  • Page 283: D-Link DNS-327L

    278 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation This button pr ovides GPS information about the images in your Slideshow . This fea ture transfers the Slidesho w to Cooliris mode. (Refer to page 280.) This button f or EXIF information for the images in y our Slideshow .[…]

  • Page 284: D-Link DNS-327L

    279 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation These buttons ar e for rotating the images in y our Slideshow . This button pops up the br owser window to displa y images from your Slideshow .[…]

  • Page 285: D-Link DNS-327L

    280 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When you click the C ooliris icon, it opens C ooliris in a new tab. Click the arrow s on each side of the Cooliris windo w to scroll between images.[…]

  • Page 286: D-Link DNS-327L

    281 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click here to activate F acebook in Cooliris . Click here to activate T witter in Cooliris . Click here to enable F ull-Screen mode . Photo Selection Slider .[…]

  • Page 287: D-Link DNS-327L

    282 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click on a photo to view separa tely . On the upper right corner of the image are the social networking links. Click here to close Single-Image view . Click here to enable into F ull-Screen mode. Click here to c onnec t to F ac ebook , or click here to connect to T witter .[…]

  • Page 288: D-Link DNS-327L

    283 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When you click the F acebook button to connect the images to your F acebook acc ount, you will see the L og in screen. When you click the T witter button to c onnect the images to your T witter account, y ou will see the Sign in screen.[…]

  • Page 289: D-Link DNS-327L

    284 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Beam a Slideshow to y our T V Y ou can enjoy your Slideshow on y our T V by using an AirPlay-enabled device with your DNS-327L. When the NAS connects to a shar ed AirPlay-enabled device on the Network, you will see a message indicating success. Click Ye s to continue.[…]

  • Page 290: D-Link DNS-327L

    285 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Photo Galler y Click Photo Galler y to view the images in your gallery . Near the top right-hand corner ther e are three buttons . Click here to view A ll Photos . Click here to view B y Calendar . Click here to Refr esh the page.[…]

  • Page 291: D-Link DNS-327L

    286 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click the All Photos button t o view all your photos in your P hoto Galler y . Click the By Calendar butt on to view your Photo Gallery by date. Click the Refresh button t o refresh the database . Y ou will see a message requesting conrmation that y ou want to r efresh the database no[…]

  • Page 292: D-Link DNS-327L

    287 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My F iles Y ou can access your les on the DNS-327L by clicking the My Files icon in the My F older window under the Home tab . My Files pr ovides access to all your les using a br owser ov er the Internet. The My Files windo w displays a list of the V olumes creat ed on the NAS. Cl[…]

  • Page 293: D-Link DNS-327L

    288 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My F iles Buttons The buttons near the right-hand side of the screen ar e for the My F iles featur es. Click the rst button to Refr esh the view . Click the second button to Do wnload les to your local PC. (Ref er to page 291.) Click the third button t o Upload les to the NAS. ([…]

  • Page 294: D-Link DNS-327L

    289 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Upload T o upload les to a selec ted volume , click the Upload button near the right-hand side of the My Files scr een. This will open the Upload windo w . Under the Upload heading, click the Brow se button to nd les on y our computer to upload t o the NAS.[…]

  • Page 295: D-Link DNS-327L

    290 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Locat e the path of the le(s) you want to upload and click Open . Click Upload to start the uploading process. Click Exit to close the Upload window . The le updates t o the NAS are displayed in the dir ector y table.[…]

  • Page 296: D-Link DNS-327L

    291 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Download T o download les from the NAS to your c omputer , selec t the le you want to download . Selec ted le will be in red. Click the Download butt on. Depending on your bro wser download settings, the br owser automatically downloads the le to y our saved location. In gene[…]

  • Page 297: D-Link DNS-327L

    292 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Co py Y ou can copy les from one f older to another folder on the DNS-327L. Bro wse for a le to c opy using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want to c opy (selected le will be in red) and right-[…]

  • Page 298: D-Link DNS-327L

    293 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Enter a name f or the new folder . Click OK . Select the newly- created f older and click Apply .[…]

  • Page 299: D-Link DNS-327L

    294 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can verify that the le copied to the corr ec t destination. Brow se for the le using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right.[…]

  • Page 300: D-Link DNS-327L

    295 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation M ove Y ou can move les from one f older to another folder of the DNS-327L. Bro wse for a le to mo ve using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you wan t to move (selected le will be in red) and right-[…]

  • Page 301: D-Link DNS-327L

    296 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select a folder from one of the V olumes or click + New to create a new path. Click Apply . Y ou can verify that the le moved t o the correct destination. Browse f or the le using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right.[…]

  • Page 302: D-Link DNS-327L

    297 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Delete Y ou can delete les from the DNS-327L usi ng your computer . Browse f or a le to delete using th e folder view on the left, and the le view on t he right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want t o delete (selected le will be in red) and right-cli[…]

  • Page 303: D-Link DNS-327L

    298 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou should no longer see the le in the folder .[…]

  • Page 304: D-Link DNS-327L

    299 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Rename Y ou can rename les on the DNS-327L. Browse f or a le to rename using the f older view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want to r ename (selected le will be in red) and right-click . F rom the drop-down […]

  • Page 305: D-Link DNS-327L

    300 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Enter a new name f or the le in the Rename eld. Click Apply . The renamed le is no w accessible from its original location.[…]

  • Page 306: D-Link DNS-327L

    301 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Pr oper ties T o get general information about a le(s) from the DNS-327L, view the properties. Brow se for a le using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want information about (selected le will be[…]

  • Page 307: D-Link DNS-327L

    302 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea te a Zip F ile Y ou can create le(s) with the .ZIP le f ormat from the DNS-327L. Brow se for the le you wan t to zip using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you wan t to zip (selected le will[…]

  • Page 308: D-Link DNS-327L

    303 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Add t o Zip Y ou can add to an existing zip le from the DNS-327L. Brow se for a zip le using the folder view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. L ocate the zip le you wan t to add a le to . Look at the le siz e of the existing […]

  • Page 309: D-Link DNS-327L

    304 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under Add to Zip: Select Path , select the zip le you wan t to have the le added to . Check the checkbox by the le name and click Apply . Y ou can check to see if the new le has been added to the zip le. In this example, w e k now it has because the le size has incr eas[…]

  • Page 310: D-Link DNS-327L

    305 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Unzipping a Zip F ile Y ou can unzip a zip le on the DNS-327L. Browse for the le y ou want to unzip using the f older view on the left, and the le view on the right. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want to unzip (selected le will be in red) and right-c[…]

  • Page 311: D-Link DNS-327L

    306 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Unzipping a T ar File Y ou can unzip a tar archive le on the DNS-327L. An unzipped le with a .tar format w orks with Linux-based systems . Browse f or the tar le you want to unzip using the f older view on the left, and the le view on the right. The unzipping proc ess for a t[…]

  • Page 312: D-Link DNS-327L

    307 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Opening a F ile Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want to open (selected le will be in red) and right-click. From the dr op- down list click Open (it turns blue). The le opens in a new bro wser window .[…]

  • Page 313: D-Link DNS-327L

    308 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Pr eviewing a F ile Y ou can preview many le f ormats on the DNS-327L: bmp, gif , ico, j2k, ji , jpeg, jpg , jpg2, pdf , png, ps , psb, psd , webp , doc, docx, xls, xlsx, mp3, and txt. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the le you want to pr eview . (selected le will b[…]

  • Page 314: D-Link DNS-327L

    309 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Share t o F acebook Y ou can share an image le on the DNS-327L to F acebook. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the image le you would like to Share to F acebook (selected le will be in red) and right-click . Fr om the drop- down list click Share t o F acebook (it turns b[…]

  • Page 315: D-Link DNS-327L

    310 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Share t o Picasa Y ou can share an image le on the DNS-327L to Picasa. Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the image le you want to Share to Picasa (selected le will be in red) and right — click. From the dr op- down list click Share t o Picasa (it turns blue). Y ou will s[…]

  • Page 316: D-Link DNS-327L

    311 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Share t o Flickr Y ou can share an image le on the DNS-327L to Flickr . Go to Applications > My F iles. Select the image le you want to Share to Flickr (selected le will be in red) and right-click. Fr om the drop- down list click Share t o Flickr (it turns blue). Y ou will se[…]

  • Page 317: D-Link DNS-327L

    312 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Music Y ou can access your music les on the DNS-327L by clicking the My Music icon in the My F older window under the Home tab. U sing this application, allows y ou to play music straight fr om the NAS. Y ou can also access music les on the network.[…]

  • Page 318: D-Link DNS-327L

    313 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click My Music to view the My Music fea tures.[…]

  • Page 319: D-Link DNS-327L

    314 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Music Inter face Click here to pla yback music to an AirPlay-enabled device ( Apple T V ). Click the button in the upper-right corner of the scr een to Refresh . The Music Play er plays tr acks directly from the DNS-327L[…]

  • Page 320: D-Link DNS-327L

    315 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Music Cat egories Click All T racks to view all the audio tracks on the DNS-327L. Click Albums to view all the albums on the DNS-327L. Click Artists to view the playlist by artist on the DNS -327L. Click Genres to view the playlist b y genre on the DNS-327L.[…]

  • Page 321: D-Link DNS-327L

    316 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click Playlists to view all playlists and cr eate new playlists on the DNS-327L.[…]

  • Page 322: D-Link DNS-327L

    317 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation C opy Music to Y our DNS-327L Acc ess your DNS-327L from your network. Click the NAS V olume directly . Cop y music directly from your local drive t o the Multimedia Shared F older of the DNS-327L. Make sure the les are only MP3 f ormat. The NAS does not acc ept .ac format (F ree L[…]

  • Page 323: D-Link DNS-327L

    318 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Go to My Music > All T racks and click the Refresh butt on. The Playlist is populat ed with the same tracks you copied on the previous page . Click Albums to view audio tracks b y album. Click Artists to view all the ar tists in your playlist.[…]

  • Page 324: D-Link DNS-327L

    319 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Playback Music on an A irPlay-Enabled De vice Go to My Music > All T racks . A ccess to your AirP lay-enabled device originates from the rst butt on in the upper right corner of the screen. Click on the name of the AirPla y-enabled device (in the screen shot below , the device name[…]

  • Page 325: D-Link DNS-327L

    320 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Pla yer Scrollable Music Timeline Stop Button Replay Button Shue Button Genre, Dura tion of the Song, and Size of the F ile Rewind Button Play/P ause Button F ast Forward Button V olume contr ol The Play er is a remote- control-like UI that will displa y the album ar t if the l[…]

  • Page 326: D-Link DNS-327L

    321 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea te a Playlist Click the Playlist option at the bott om of the list, under My Music . Click the Plus button at the top right -hand corner of the screen. The Create a New Playlist window appears . Enter a name by Pla ylist Name and click the songs you wish to add t o the playlist. Cli[…]

  • Page 327: D-Link DNS-327L

    322 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click the Edit button to add or delet e songs from the Playlist . Once you ar e in Edit mode, click the track y ou want to delete and click the Delete button. Click on the Playlist to view its con tents. Click the Back button t o return to the Playlist menu[…]

  • Page 328: D-Link DNS-327L

    323 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Sur veillance The My Sur veillance app works with most D-Link Cloud cameras (see list below). It manages your IP cameras from the NAS and allo ws all streaming data to be sav ed to the NAS. My Sur veillanc e can connect up to four cameras. By default, My Surveillanc e is disabled. The[…]

  • Page 329: D-Link DNS-327L

    324 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation After My Sur veillance is enabled , a new brow ser window opens. Befor e you proc eed, make sure y ou have the corr ec t plug-ins to view the streaming video . Ther e may be a message at the top of y our browser that says , Missing plug-in on this page . Click where it says , Click Here […]

  • Page 330: D-Link DNS-327L

    325 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Once the le is downloaded , double — click or right- click the Downloads window and select Open . The Sur veillanceCent erRealInstall Setup Wizard will giv e you step-by-step instructions on how to install the progr am on your computer . Click Nex t to continue .[…]

  • Page 331: D-Link DNS-327L

    326 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click on Brow se and selec t a location for the installation f older . Y ou have the option t o click on Everyone if y ou would like to install the software for everyone who uses your comput er . Click Nex t to continue . Click Nex t to proceed with installa tion.[…]

  • Page 332: D-Link DNS-327L

    327 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The nal window will ha ve a heading that says , Installation Complet e. Click Close to continue . Now when you c onnec t a suppor ted camera to the network, the My Surveillance software will detect it automatically . The software will recog nize the IP address, model number and bit r […]

  • Page 333: D-Link DNS-327L

    328 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Logging in to My Sur veillance f or the rst time using Internet Explorer requires an add-on. The add-on message appears at the top of the brow ser , nex t to the question mark. Click on the line that says , If you trust the w ebsite and the add-on and want to install it , click here .[…]

  • Page 334: D-Link DNS-327L

    329 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A warning message appears for the Global Digital program by D-Link Corporation. Click Ye s to conrm that you w ant to allow the following program t o make changes to your c omputer . After conrmation is rec eived, Internet Explorer will displa y the live camera feed .[…]

  • Page 335: D-Link DNS-327L

    330 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Surveillance Center Camer a Configur ation wizard is launched automatically when you ac cess Live Video . It automatically searches f or any a vailable network cameras. Y ou will see a list of connected cameras at the bottom of the window . If no cameras are detected, a r ed notic[…]

  • Page 336: D-Link DNS-327L

    331 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When the Surveillance Center C amera Congur ation window closes, y our brow ser will display the LIVE VIEW . Note: If there are no c ameras connected , there is no video stream to display . Make sure y our camer as are properly connected . Close the brow ser tab to exit.[…]

  • Page 337: D-Link DNS-327L

    332 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Sur veillance U ser Inter face The My Sur veillance user interface is based on the camera featur es. Ev er yday operation is dependent upon the camer a functionalit y . Y ou will see live video in the window s below the heading, LIVE VIEW . See details below . Click on this link to vi[…]

  • Page 338: D-Link DNS-327L

    333 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My Sur veillance Logo Camer a Name(s) and IP Address Camer a Vie w Mode E-map , Snapshot, and A uto Scan Mute and V olume Slider Pan- Tilt-Zoom C ontrol (PTZ) Stop/Start Live Camer a Vie w Manual Recording & General Settings T ab Digital Zoom Camer a details Live V iew Pa trol Modes […]

  • Page 339: D-Link DNS-327L

    334 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Live V iew Components C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION Live V ideo View the Liv e Video fr om cameras connected to your DNS-327L via the network. Stop/Start Click to Stop or Start Live Camera View . Manual Recording & General Settings T ab Click the Manual Recording button to S top or Star t M[…]

  • Page 340: D-Link DNS-327L

    335 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Use these buttons to St op or Star t the operation of the selected camera. These icons show the S tatus of each camera and allow you t o double — click to toggle between the Status of each camera. These icons allow y ou to switch the Camera View to display a sing le Camera V iew or View […]

  • Page 341: D-Link DNS-327L

    336 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click this button to select the Single Camera Mode . The viewing area changes from f our screens to a single , full-frame image. Click this butt on to return to Split C amera Mode . Single Camer a Live V ideo Mode[…]

  • Page 342: D-Link DNS-327L

    337 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click this button to select F ull Screen Camer a Mode . The viewing angle expands t o cover the en tire screen. Click this button to return t o Split Screen Camera Mode , dividing the scr een into four images fr om four di erent cameras . ( This can also be accomplished b y switching […]

  • Page 343: D-Link DNS-327L

    338 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When Enable Digital Zoom is checked, the soft ware allo ws you to z oom in and out on an area of the image. Y ou can place the mouse pointer in the bottom right c orner of the image to click and drag so you can view di erent parts of the screen. Y ou can also click directly on the par[…]

  • Page 344: D-Link DNS-327L

    339 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can access the E-map fr om the Live Video screen b y click ing the button. Click the button to upload images int o the database. When you click E-map Upload , you ar e directed to the E-map window . Note: you m ust have installed E-map JPEG les in order to use this feature . (Ref[…]

  • Page 345: D-Link DNS-327L

    340 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Snapshot V iew Y ou can access Snapshot fr om the Live Video screen by click ing the button. This takes a snapshot of your current liv e screen image . Y ou can copy this image t o the clipboard by clicking on the button, or you can sav e the image to disk by clicking the button. Click t[…]

  • Page 346: D-Link DNS-327L

    341 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation If the camera is congured to r ecord when motion is det ected, the camera icon on the E-map scr een will change to red whenev er motion is detected, as shown belo w . When motion is detected, an alarm is triggered. Click on the Red C amera icon on the E-map to play the r ecorded ev en[…]

  • Page 347: D-Link DNS-327L

    342 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation P atrol settings ar e dependent upon the camera you ar e using. The Sur veillance C enter w orks with the following D-Link PTZ cameras: • DCS-5230/5230L, and DCS-5222L/5211L (P atrol Once). Click the P atro l icon to congure P atrol settings. C onguring Pa trol Settings Scroll do[…]

  • Page 348: D-Link DNS-327L

    343 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When you click the P reset P oint icon a drop- down list appears. Y ou can edit the existing Pr esets. Click the Pr eset Poin t icon and select whichever preset you wish t o delete. C onguring Pa trol P reset P oints This opens the PTZ P reset P oint window . Enter a Preset Name and c[…]

  • Page 349: D-Link DNS-327L

    344 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click the Go to Preset P oint icon. This directs the camera to the designated poin ts. V iewing Pr eset P oints[…]

  • Page 350: D-Link DNS-327L

    345 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Live V ideo/Playback Settings Y ou can access the General Setting window from the V ideo Playback window by clicking the Settings (cog) button on the Playback screen. Record Display The Record Display function is only available when accessed fr om the Playback scr een. The Record Display[…]

  • Page 351: D-Link DNS-327L

    346 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation OSD Settings Y ou can access the OSD (On-Screen Displa y) Setting window from the Video Playback window b y click ing the Settings button and then selecting the OSD tab at the top . The OSD Setting window allo ws you to adjust settings f or the information and the backgr ound color you w[…]

  • Page 352: D-Link DNS-327L

    347 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Playback Open Record Camer a Vie w Mode Settings/Snapshot/Sync Playback Mute and V olume Slider Digital Zoom Playback C ontrols Recorded V ideo Playback Note: See description of components on the next page of this Manual. Camer a Details[…]

  • Page 353: D-Link DNS-327L

    348 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION Recorded V ideo Playback View the Recor ded Video . Playback C ontrols Contr ol the Video Pla yback from here (clockwise): Play/St op/Pause/ P revious Second/P revious Minute/Next M inute/ Next Second / Speed Up/Speed Down / Zoom In/Zoom Out. Camera Details This ar[…]

  • Page 354: D-Link DNS-327L

    349 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Playback scr een is where you can view r ecordings fr om the cameras. Use this button to View the Recorded Video Information. (See next page for details.) The top two ic ons allow you t o control the C amera View fr om a Single Camera to up to F our Network Cameras . The bottom two i[…]

  • Page 355: D-Link DNS-327L

    350 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When you click the Open Recor ding button on the Playback screen, you will see the Recor d Information window . This scr een allows you to see details about the recor dings that have been made with the connected cameras. Depending on your settings, y ou may see a Calendar View or List of[…]

  • Page 356: D-Link DNS-327L

    351 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Playback Setup Camer a Setup Audio & Video Setup Recording Setup Ev ent Setup E-map Upload Backup Ser ver P ort S etup Note: See detailed description of Setup on the pages that follow .[…]

  • Page 357: D-Link DNS-327L

    352 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Camer a Setup Once you click Setup , Camera Setup is the rst screen to congur e. On the left side are the sub-menus while on the right are the congurable options. Camer a Setup is divided into four sections. W izard , Camera List , C amera Search , and Auto Install .[…]

  • Page 358: D-Link DNS-327L

    353 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can add a camera with the Camera Setup Wizard . Click Run W izard to open. Y ou will see a list of the steps used for setting up the camera. Click Nex t to continue . The Setup Wizard does a camera sear ch. Y ou will see the word , Searching… in red. W ait for search r esults. If […]

  • Page 359: D-Link DNS-327L

    354 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Camer a Search screen appears blank if the Camer a Setup Wizard was unable to nd your camer a. Make sure you hav e either connected your camera to the r outer , or you have enabled DHCP on y our router to detect your camera. If you have set up y our camera properly , you will see […]

  • Page 360: D-Link DNS-327L

    355 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click the Selec t button by the the camera details and click Next . If you set up your IP camera on the network corr ectly, the elds within the D evice Information windo w will be automatically populated with your device information. Click the T est Camera button t o view streaming vi[…]

  • Page 361: D-Link DNS-327L

    356 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under Basic Recording , select your recor ding method. In this instance, we hav e chosen, Record By Schedule . Drag and Dr op your mouse ov er the elds represen ting the day and time you wish to r ecord. The selected area is highlighted in blue . Click Motion Detection Record if you p[…]

  • Page 362: D-Link DNS-327L

    357 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under Camera Setup , the Camer a List includes your newly-congured camera. Y ou can modify the camera settings. Select a camera from the Camer a List . Y ou will see the details for the selected camera. Y ou can change the Name, IP Address and Por t . Y ou can enter the Username and P[…]

  • Page 363: D-Link DNS-327L

    358 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will see a pop -up message with a green check mark, indicating the conguration was suc cessful. Click Ye s to continue. Y ou can also delete a camera from the Camer a List . Select a camera from the camera list. Under the delete heading , click the T rash icon. A pop-up message w[…]

  • Page 364: D-Link DNS-327L

    359 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A pop-up message indicates the operation was successful . Click Ye s to exit.[…]

  • Page 365: D-Link DNS-327L

    360 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Search and A dd a Camera Click the Search button to sear ch all available cameras on the network. Select one camera and click Ad d T o to add a camera to the list . (Camera2 is used in this example.)[…]

  • Page 366: D-Link DNS-327L

    361 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Enter the camera passw ord and click the T est Camera butt on to view streaming video from the c onnected camera. Click Modify to add the camera to the Camer a List. Y ou will see the additional camera on the list. Click Save Settings to continue .[…]

  • Page 367: D-Link DNS-327L

    362 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A pop-up message conrms the camera was congured succ essfully . Click Ye s . Under Auto Install , check the box b y Enable Auto Install to det ect other IP Cameras the next time you acc ess the LIVE VIEW .[…]

  • Page 368: D-Link DNS-327L

    363 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Audio and V ideo The Audio and Video screen allo ws you to c ongure all your audio and video settings f or each camera on the Camer a List . Below are instructions for a single camera conguration. Under Setup > Audio and Video , y ou will see Name , Address and Model for all cam[…]

  • Page 369: D-Link DNS-327L

    364 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation V ideo Prole : Select a prole number from the dr op -down list. V ideo F ormat : Choose the video format to use f or your rec ordings. Each format has di erent size and quality characteristics. Fr ame Rate: This is the number of frames per second recor ded. A higher number of fr[…]

  • Page 370: D-Link DNS-327L

    365 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Recording Setup The Recor ding Setup screen allows you t o congure all your r ecording settings f or each camera on the Camera List . The setup options include Quota Setting, Event Rec ord, and Rec ording mode.[…]

  • Page 371: D-Link DNS-327L

    366 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under S etup > Recording Setup , you will see Index number , Name , A ddress, and Used/Quota for all cameras on your Camer a List . If you double — click on the name of the device, y ou will see the conguration options below .[…]

  • Page 372: D-Link DNS-327L

    367 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Estimated data spac e usage per day (appro x.) C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION Motion Detection When using the Recor d by Schedule mode together with the Motion Detection func tion, you must rst click the Go to W eb link and log in to the camera ’ s web inter face and enable the motion detec[…]

  • Page 373: D-Link DNS-327L

    368 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Copy Component: If you want to cop y a camera ’ s Recording Setup to other similar cameras, click on the button under the Copy heading. Motion Detection Component: Allows the user t o enable or disable the motion detection function. Here is an example of a camera ’ s Motion Detec tio[…]

  • Page 374: D-Link DNS-327L

    369 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Copy Recording Setup window opens. Check the box es by each Camera Name to copy setup t o similar cameras. Click Save to continue. A message pops up that indicates c onguration was successful . Click Ye s to continue.[…]

  • Page 375: D-Link DNS-327L

    370 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Recording Mode C omponent: Recording Mode with Rec ord by Schedule selected: Click the blue box, b y Alway s Record , t o set normal recording mode . ( This means the camera will alwa ys recor d for a specic period.) Drag your mouse o ver the time frame you w ant to set for r ecording[…]

  • Page 376: D-Link DNS-327L

    371 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Recording Mode , with Rec ord by Schedule selected: Click the red box, by Motion Detection Record if y ou want to w ait f or motion to be detected befor e the camera begins rec ording. Drag the mouse ov er the time frame you want to set f or recor ding. The selected frames turn to red to[…]

  • Page 377: D-Link DNS-327L

    372 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T o delete selec ted time frames, click the ligh t blue Delete box. Drag the mouse ov er the selec ted frames you w ant to unselect. The selected frames should no longer be visible. Click Save Settings to nish.[…]

  • Page 378: D-Link DNS-327L

    373 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Recording Mode , with Rec ord by Schedule selected: If you would like to ha ve cameras rec ording at all times, click Selec t All to ll in all time frames with pr eferred Recor ding Mode .[…]

  • Page 379: D-Link DNS-327L

    374 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Ev ent Setup The Event Setup conguration t ool displays options for each camer a. The basic settings specify how y ou want your surveillance notications sent. The A dvanced button under E vent Setup takes you to the Notic ation Setup window , where you can congur e your E-mai[…]

  • Page 380: D-Link DNS-327L

    375 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation C OMPONENT DESCRIPTION New Camera A dd Noties you when a new camera is c onnec ted. Camera Delete Noties you when a camera is delet ed from the connected cameras. Connection Lost Noties you when there is a netw ork error . Connection Resumed Noties you when the network is bac[…]

  • Page 381: D-Link DNS-327L

    376 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T o ac tivate advanced f eatures , click the Advanc ed button. The Notication Setup window pops up . E-mail Settings were originally co vered in this manual on page 237. Ref er to this page if you need mor e details about completing the required elds . Click S av e Settings when do[…]

  • Page 382: D-Link DNS-327L

    377 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation E-Map Upload The E-Map Upload congur ation page allows you t o impor t a schematic illustration of the home or oce space y ou want to monitor using y our IP cameras. T he E-map can be uploaded in JPEG, BMP , GIF , or PNG format to the DNS-327L . Then y ou can access the E-Map from […]

  • Page 383: D-Link DNS-327L

    378 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under E-Map Upload , click the Brow se button, and navigate to the location of the E-map you wan t to use. After you select the le, you will see it in the File P ath eld. Click Upload .[…]

  • Page 384: D-Link DNS-327L

    379 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The image from the le will be displa yed on right side of the screen. The next step is to click and drag a camera name fr om the Camera list to the left of the image. After you dr ag the camera name to the desired location on the image, double- click to set the orientation of the came[…]

  • Page 385: D-Link DNS-327L

    380 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will see a pop -up message indicating E-Map was set up successfully . Click Ye s to continue.[…]

  • Page 386: D-Link DNS-327L

    381 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Backup The Setup > Backup page allows you t o congure the DNS-327L to back up and r estore the IP Camera r ecordings .[…]

  • Page 387: D-Link DNS-327L

    382 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under Create New Backup , you can enter the name f or the backup Folder in the eld provided , and click the Brow se button to select a Destination path. The Selec t Path windo w will open. Select a path on the NAS where you want the backup to r eside. Click Apply . If you do not have […]

  • Page 388: D-Link DNS-327L

    383 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Check the the F older name and the Destination path. F rom the drop-down menus, you can select a Start Date/Time and a Stop Dat e/Time .[…]

  • Page 389: D-Link DNS-327L

    384 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T o ac tivate the camera you w ould like to use for backup , check the box next to the camera ’ s name. Click Save Settings to nish. The Archive table at the bottom populates after you sav e the data. A pop-up message conrms the new backup was added successfully . Click Ye s to c[…]

  • Page 390: D-Link DNS-327L

    385 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation After you cr eate a new backup, it will appear in the table in the Archiv e section. Y ou can control which archiv e folders are included in the Playback List that is accessible fr om the Playback screen by adding or r emoving a check mark in the Playback List column. If you want to dele[…]

  • Page 391: D-Link DNS-327L

    386 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Ser ver P or t The Ser ver Port page allows you t o modify the ser ver por ts for the Live V ideo Ser ver , Playback Ser ver and Conguration Server . Y ou may wish to do this if you hav e por t restrictions on your local network. Change the por t numbers using the elds provided and[…]

  • Page 392: D-Link DNS-327L

    387 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Camera S tatus Log Playback S tatus Note: See detailed description of Status on the pages that follow .[…]

  • Page 393: D-Link DNS-327L

    388 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Camer a Status and Log The Status congur ation section consists of two things — Camera Status and Log . The Camera Status show s the Connection Status of all the cameras connected to the network, and Lo g shows a history of signicant events tha t occurred with the Sur veillance C e[…]

  • Page 394: D-Link DNS-327L

    389 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T o back up your log to a t ext le, click the Backup Log button. Select a S a ve A s folder location and click Save . The pop-up message indicates the log is successfully sa ved. Click Y es to continue .[…]

  • Page 395: D-Link DNS-327L

    390 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T o clear the log, click the Clear Log button. Y ou are asked to verify that you w ant to clear the log. Click Ye s to continue . There will only be one ev ent remaining in your log , under Info , that says Log le w as cleared .[…]

  • Page 396: D-Link DNS-327L

    391 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation My F av orites A pplication The My F avorites Applications section allows users to add applications to the Home section so users can easily access these applications. F ollow these steps to setup easy acc ess to your fav orite apps under the Home tab .[…]

  • Page 397: D-Link DNS-327L

    392 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Adding A pplications Under M y F avorite Applic ations , click the Add/Remov e button. Click the checkbox below each application you wish t o add to the Home screen. Click Apply to con tinue. The shortcut for the selected application is now visible on the Home scr een.[…]

  • Page 398: D-Link DNS-327L

    393 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Schedule le and folder backups from an FTP server , web ser ver , or local network share. Alwa ys test the URL bef ore applying changes. This will help to ensure a succ essful download. Applica tions Category: Selec t the type of ser ver that the source les and f olders for the sch[…]

  • Page 399: D-Link DNS-327L

    394 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Category: Click the HT TP radio button to specify that the sour ce les are located on a web server . URL: Enter the HT TP site address for the scheduled download. Click on T est to verify access to the sit e address and le/folder . If you selected File from the dr op- down list, yo[…]

  • Page 400: D-Link DNS-327L

    395 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Remote Backups The Remote Backups section allows you to back up y our DNS-327L to another NAS or Linux Server . Or the other way around, fr om a remote NAS or Linux Ser ver to your DNS-327L . Click the Creat e button, located abov e the Remote Backups list, to start the Remote Backup Wiz[…]

  • Page 401: D-Link DNS-327L

    396 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Remote Backup W izard When you click the Create button, located abov e the Remote Backup list, the Remote Backup Wizard starts. The wizard provides st ep -by-step instructions for a remote backup . Step 1 — Review the ve -step process . Click Nex t to continue. Step 2 — Selec t Ser vi[…]

  • Page 402: D-Link DNS-327L

    397 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 3 — Enter L ocal Settings: T ask (Name) — name used to refer t o the backup job, which will appear later in the Remote Backup list. F older Path — click Bro wse and select a local network share folder or le as the target or sour ce for the backup job . Click Nex t to continue. St[…]

  • Page 403: D-Link DNS-327L

    398 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 5 — Continue Remote Settings: Remote Pa th — Fr om the drop- down menu, select the le system (folder) pa th to the remote target or sour ce system for backup. Click Nex t to continue. Step 6 — Enter Schedule Settings: Select S chedule mode from one of the follo wing: • Manual -[…]

  • Page 404: D-Link DNS-327L

    399 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 7 — Click on the Finish button if y ou are satised with the settings of the Backup job created . O ther wise click on the Previous butt on to go back and make changes, or click Exit to close the wizar d without adding a Remote Backup job . Step 8 — Review details of Remote Backup[…]

  • Page 405: D-Link DNS-327L

    400 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Local Backups Schedule local le and folder backups from the local network shar e of the device or from the local comput er . Always test the URL bef ore applying changes. This will help to ensure a succ essful backup. Category: If your NAS device has two volumes, y ou can click the In[…]

  • Page 406: D-Link DNS-327L

    401 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation T ime Machine The Time Machine section allows the Mac user to congure the DNS-327L so that it becomes a backup destination in the Mac OS® X Time Machine. In order to use this function, Apple F iling Prot ocol (AFP) is requir ed. The AFP ser vice will star t automatically as soon as t[…]

  • Page 407: D-Link DNS-327L

    402 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Setup W izard Go to Applications > Local Backups > T ime Machine . Under Time Machine Enable/Disable click the Enable Time Machine checkbox. Click the turquoise arrow next to T ime Machine Settings to see the conguration options . Click New under Time Machine Settings to open th[…]

  • Page 408: D-Link DNS-327L

    403 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Check the box(es) b y the V olume(s) you want t o use for Time Machine destinations and click Nex t to continue. A Summary displays your selected destinations. Click F inish .[…]

  • Page 409: D-Link DNS-327L

    404 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When the Setup Wizard window closes , you will see the T ime Machine table. Under Time Machine Settings , you will see the V olumes you just selected for the backup process . The V olumes are also viewable in the Finder .[…]

  • Page 410: D-Link DNS-327L

    405 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can browse the Volume in F inder to ensure you made the c orrect selection. Go to System P references . Under System , click T ime Machine .[…]

  • Page 411: D-Link DNS-327L

    406 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation F rom the Time Machine screen, click Select Backup Disk … Locat e the DNS-327L V olumes.[…]

  • Page 412: D-Link DNS-327L

    407 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the V olume you want to use f or the backup and click Use Disk . Log in to the server . Enter a Name and P assword . Click Connect .[…]

  • Page 413: D-Link DNS-327L

    408 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Time Machine backup process is complete . Review your settings. Note: Y ou can deactivate T ime Machine, by moving the slider fr om ON to OFF . However , this does not delete the Volumes fr om the DNS-327L settings.[…]

  • Page 414: D-Link DNS-327L

    409 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Delete a V olume Under Time Machine Settings, select the V olume you want to delet e. When you click on a V olume , the row turns red. Click the Delet e button. A pop-up message prompts you to v erify that you want to delet e the V olume. Click Ye s .[…]

  • Page 415: D-Link DNS-327L

    410 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The V olume is no longer visible in Finder . If you need to remo ve all network shares, click Remove A ll Network Shares . (If not, you can skip the next page of instruc tions.)[…]

  • Page 416: D-Link DNS-327L

    411 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation After all shares ar e removed , you will see an empty table under Time Machine Settings. A pop-up message appears ask ing you to conrm you w ant to remove all shares . Click Y es to continue.[…]

  • Page 417: D-Link DNS-327L

    412 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation USB and MTP Backups The USB Backups section allows the user t o congure the DNS-327L so that it becomes a backup destination f or a USB device that is connected to your NAS. F or example , you can backup data from a USB stor age device to the DNS-327L, or from the NAS to a USB st orag[…]

  • Page 418: D-Link DNS-327L

    413 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click on the Save Settings button t o save the MTP Backups settings . Click on the Save Settings button t o save the USB Backups settings . MTP Backups USB Backups MTP Backups: Click Enable to allow your DNS-327L to c opy digital media content fr om a MTP — compatible USB device . Destin[…]

  • Page 419: D-Link DNS-327L

    414 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation 1. Connec t a MTP USB device t o the USB por t on the back panel of the device . The DNS-327L will enter backup mode if MTP Backups has been enabled in the MTP Backup settings. (Ref er to previous page .) 2. Pr ess the USB button to start the back up process . The white USB LED ashes […]

  • Page 420: D-Link DNS-327L

    415 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation 4. When the backup is complete , the ashing white LED will become solid white . Pr ess and hold the USB button on the front of the NAS f or a minimum of ve seconds , and the DNS-327L will unmount the device. 3. Go to S yst em Management > USB Devices . Under USB Stor age Informa[…]

  • Page 421: D-Link DNS-327L

    416 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation 1. Connect a USB storage device t o the USB por t on the back panel of the device . The LED will blink and then become solid once it is r eady for backup , if USB Backups has been enabled in the USB backup settings. (Refer t o page 413.) . 2. Press the USB button on the fr ont of the NAS[…]

  • Page 422: D-Link DNS-327L

    417 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation 3. When the backup is completed , the ashing white LED will become solid white . One way to unmoun t the USB storage device is t o press and hold the USB button at the front of the DNS-327L f or a minimum of ve seconds . The other wa y is, go to Management > Syt em Management &g[…]

  • Page 423: D-Link DNS-327L

    418 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Go to P2P Downloads > Settings to congur e the P2P (peer-to-peer) download management settings. P2P: Selec t Enable or Disable . Download Schedule: Using the Date/Time table , the user can schedule the P2P downloads. Simply click on the Start Download and Stop Download bo x and sel[…]

  • Page 424: D-Link DNS-327L

    419 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation P2P Download List Under P2P Downloads , the user can add torrent les and view P2P download lists . Add T orren t from URL: I n the eld provided you can c opy and paste a link to a torrent le hosted on the Internet. The P2P download manager will add the torre nt file to the downl[…]

  • Page 425: D-Link DNS-327L

    420 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Amazon S3 (Simple Storage Service) is an online storage web service oered by A WS (Amazon W eb Services). I t provides a simple web services interface that can be used to store and r etrieve any amount of data a t any time from an ywhere on the web . With Amazon S3 support, it is poss[…]

  • Page 426: D-Link DNS-327L

    421 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Crea ting an A WS Acc ount Open your web br owser and type the follo wing link for the Amazon W eb Ser vices : http://ww w .a ws.amaz on.com/s3. Then click on the link on the right side of the screen, Sign Up No w . F ollow the instructions to creat e your A WS account.[…]

  • Page 427: D-Link DNS-327L

    422 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Enter your E-mail address, click the I am a Ne w User radio button, and follow the instructions to select the amount of desired stor age. This creates y our Amazon S3 account. Y ou will be issued the following keys as cr edentials to give y ou access to the accoun t: 1. Acc ess Key ID 2.[…]

  • Page 428: D-Link DNS-327L

    423 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can either create a DNS-327L backup , or transfer a rest ore job to the Amazon S3 Cloud Storage. Y ou must provide the da ta requested by the wizard in or der to creat e a backup or restore job . Step 1: Enter Job Name Settings: In the text box by Job Name , enter a 16 character nam[…]

  • Page 429: D-Link DNS-327L

    424 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 2: Enter Remot e Settings: Ac cess K ey ID: Enter the Amazon S3 Acc ess Key ID you w ere assigned when you crea ted your A WS (Amazon W eb Ser vices) account. This is required f or access to Amazon S3 Cloud St orage. Secret Ac cess K ey: Enter the Secret Acc ess Key you w ere assign[…]

  • Page 430: D-Link DNS-327L

    425 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Step 4: Enter L o cal Settings: Use the Bro wser button to locate the path t o the DNS-327L ’ s le location for either the backup or rest ore job . Click Nex t to continue . Step 5: Enter Schedule Settings: The Schedule Mode for the job can be either Manual (now or later fr om the j[…]

  • Page 431: D-Link DNS-327L

    426 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Modify Button Once a backup or restor e job is created , the Modify button is used to change the settings described in the Amazon S3 Settings Wizard instructions. When you click on a job in the Amazon S3 table , the text turns red. Click the Modify button if you w ant to edit the setting[…]

  • Page 432: D-Link DNS-327L

    427 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The free m ydlink ser vice provides DNS-327L users ac cess to Cloud Ser vices. Connect to the m ydlink ser vice from an y location, using any operating system. If you ar e not connecting to the ser vice directly from the DNS-327L, open your bro wser and type in w ww .mydlink.com. Sign in[…]

  • Page 433: D-Link DNS-327L

    428 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation After you sign up f or a my dlink account, check your E-mail bo x. Y ou should receive an E-mail like the one belo w . Click the link to activate your my dlink account. m ydlink V erication[…]

  • Page 434: D-Link DNS-327L

    429 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou will receive an E-mail that sa ys your E-mail address has been v eried. Y ou can change your P assword and/or updat e your Pr ole Information .[…]

  • Page 435: D-Link DNS-327L

    430 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation When you rst log int o your account , you may see a screen tha t says you need the Jav a Runtime Environment (JRE). This screen has a button that says Do wnload JRE . Note: JRE is also referred t o as Java Virtual Machine. m ydlink Ja va Runtime En vironment[…]

  • Page 436: D-Link DNS-327L

    431 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The Jav a download takes a few steps . F ollow the instructions:[…]

  • Page 437: D-Link DNS-327L

    432 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation After you install Jav a , you will see the Security Information window . Click Run to run the mydlink applica tion. When prompted , enter the P assword and click OK .[…]

  • Page 438: D-Link DNS-327L

    433 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Once you ar e connected, you can view y our existing storage on the Cloud and on your DNS-327L. Y ou can also upload and download les using your bro wser , create new f olders, rename f olders and delete folders . (See instruc tions on the next page of this manual.)[…]

  • Page 439: D-Link DNS-327L

    434 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Click on a V olume to see its conten ts. Buttons at the top of the scr een allow you to Upload and Download les , create a N ew F older , Delete and Rename les.[…]

  • Page 440: D-Link DNS-327L

    435 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation F rom the mydlink por tal, click the New F older button to cr eate a new folder . Crea ting a New F older T o delete a folder , click the check box next to the le you wish to delet e and click the Delete button. A conrmation windo w will appear for you to c onrm the deletion. Cl[…]

  • Page 441: D-Link DNS-327L

    436 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under the Settings T ab > General Information you can view the pr oper ties of your NAS. This screen displays the Device Name , mydlink No ., Model Name , M AC address (which is associated with your ac count and NAS), and your device activation time and date . Y ou can also see the ro[…]

  • Page 442: D-Link DNS-327L

    437 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can check the online status of your DNS-327L while connected to mydlink . Y our online status may be one of the following: DNS-327L Status A green checkmark indicates that your NAS is online and r eady for use . A yellow ex clamation point indicat es that your DNS-327L is online, bu[…]

  • Page 443: D-Link DNS-327L

    438 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Select the device you wish to delete from y our account and click Delete Devic e . A warning message aler ts you that removing the device will r emov e any mydlink functions related to the devic e . Deleting a m ydlink devic e Enter your m ydlink P assword t o proceed with deleting the d[…]

  • Page 444: D-Link DNS-327L

    439 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Under P role Information , click the Delete acc ount link at the bottom right corner of the screen. Deleting a m ydlink acc ount A warning message asks you if you ar e certain that you want to delete your acc ount at mydlink? Select No , keep it to do nothing or click Y es, delete it […]

  • Page 445: D-Link DNS-327L

    440 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation A new Delete account window appears . Enter your mydlink password . Click Cancel if y ou would like to keep your ac count, or click C onrm Deletion to delete it. Y ou will see conrmation that your accoun t has been deleted. Click on Exit.[…]

  • Page 446: D-Link DNS-327L

    441 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation The m ydlink A cc ess NAS App Acc ess your les anytime , anywhere with your DNS-327L NAS and the my dlink Access-NAS app . Str eam your stored phot os, documents, music , and movies directly to your iOS and A ndroid devices ov er 3G or Wi-F i.[…]

  • Page 447: D-Link DNS-327L

    […]

  • Page 448: D-Link DNS-327L

    443 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation C ompatibility mydlink A ccess-NAS is c ompatible with the following models: • DNS-320L ShareCent er 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosur e • DNS-327L ShareCent er 2-Bay Network Attached Stor age • More coming soon! Note: If you are using a DNS-325 or DNS-345, please use the mydlin[…]

  • Page 449: D-Link DNS-327L

    444 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 4 — Congur ation Y ou can download the mydlink Ac cess-NAS app fr om links below : iOS (iT unes App Store) https://itunes.apple .com/us/app/my dlink-access-nas/ id531078699?l=zh&mt=8 Android ( Google Play) https://play .google.com/store/apps/details?id=c om.dlink.nas&hl=en[…]

  • Page 450: D-Link DNS-327L

    445 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Knowledge Base Wha t is RAID? RAID , shor t for Redundant Array of Independent Disks , is a combination of two or more disks with the aim of pr oviding fault tolerance and per formance impro vement. There are sev eral dieren t levels of RAID , with each one providing a di erent meth[…]

  • Page 451: D-Link DNS-327L

    446 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base RAID 0 provides data striping , which spreads out blocks of data ov er all the drives, but does not provide da ta redundancy. Although per formance is impro ved, the lack of fault tolerance means tha t if one drive fails, all data in the array will be lost. RAID 1 RAID 1 provides mirrorin[…]

  • Page 452: D-Link DNS-327L

    447 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base RAID Options Below is a list of the RAID options available on the DNS-327L. Standard RAID — creat es a single volume for one driv e or more drives. JBOD — allows you to cr eate a large virtual disk drive by concatena ting two or more smaller drives t ogether . The individual hard drives t[…]

  • Page 453: D-Link DNS-327L

    448 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base RAID 1 — allows you to assig n two disks as a mirrored set. Once you crea te the mirrored set, y ou will see it as a single disk drive. But when you write data t o the mirrored set, it will duplicate the data across all members of the set. This ensures that y our data is protected against[…]

  • Page 454: D-Link DNS-327L

    449 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base UPS C onnec tivit y The DNS-327L suppor ts USB UPS (Uninterruptible P ower Supply). This gives users the ability to shar e the UPS on their local network and protect from an abnormal shutdown due t o a power failure . Connect a UPS to the USB port on the back of your NAS . Standalone and […]

  • Page 455: D-Link DNS-327L

    450 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Go to Management > Sy stem Management > USB Devices . Click the turquoise arro w next to UPS S ettings . Ther e are two modes to choose from, S tandalone or Master . Select Standalone to use the UPS only on the DNS-327L or select Master to share the UPS with the network UPS slaves .[…]

  • Page 456: D-Link DNS-327L

    451 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Enter the IP address of the other UPS sla ve on the network. Click the + button if you need t o add more IP addresses . Make sure the DNS-327L and the UPS slaves ar e on the same physical network. Once you ha ve enter ed an IP address, the syst em will check its database for IP addr ess r[…]

  • Page 457: D-Link DNS-327L

    452 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base The UPS Settings table will display the IP address(es) you added . Y our DNS-327L is now setup as the network master to notify the network slaves in the ev ent of critical power status .[…]

  • Page 458: D-Link DNS-327L

    453 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Deleting a UPS Sla ve Under Management > Syst em Management > USB Devices > UPS Setting , select the IP address. Y our selection will tur n red. Click Delete . While proc essing your request, ther e will be a message that says , W aiting for UPS Settings … When processing is c […]

  • Page 459: D-Link DNS-327L

    454 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base The deleted IP addr ess will no longer be visible in the table under UPS Setting.[…]

  • Page 460: D-Link DNS-327L

    455 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base USB P rint Ser ver The DNS-327L featur es a built-in USB print ser ver , giving users the ability to share a printer on their local network. Connect a USB printer to the USB por t on the back of the device. It is impor tant to ensure tha t any of the printer manufacturer ’ s dr ivers ar[…]

  • Page 461: D-Link DNS-327L

    456 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Select the pr inter driver by using the installed Manufacturer list or click the Hav e Disk button to brow se for the printer driver le . Click OK to continue . The W indows ® Add P rinter Wizard will launch: Connect to your device with Samba and then double- click the lP icon.[…]

  • Page 462: D-Link DNS-327L

    457 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Make sure the correct drive is selected and click OK to install the printer . The printer is now installed and the print er queue will appear .[…]

  • Page 463: D-Link DNS-327L

    458 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Setting up a Prin ter U sing Mac OS® X 10.8 Go to Management > Sy stem Management > USB Devices to view the printer attached to y our NAS. Go to Management > S ystem Managemen t > Device > De vice Settings to check settings.[…]

  • Page 464: D-Link DNS-327L

    459 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Download drivers from the r espective printer manufacturer(s) to install on your Mac. ( Y ou need to selec t the proper rmw are for Mac OS 10.8) Go to Sy stem Pref erences > Hardware , and click Print & Scan .[…]

  • Page 465: D-Link DNS-327L

    460 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Within the P rint & Scan window , click the + sign to set up a printer . Within the Add window , click the IP tab .[…]

  • Page 466: D-Link DNS-327L

    461 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Enter the IP A ddress and the Queue information. Note: Under the Queue section, enter “lp ” (where “ lp ” stands for Line Printer). Under Location , Select Printer Software .[…]

  • Page 467: D-Link DNS-327L

    462 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Sec tion 5 — Knowledge Base Select your specic printer . (I f you cannot nd a driver f or your printer , download the driver fr om the manufac turer’ s web site and install it.) The IP printer now appears under P rint & Scan . The IP address is clearly visible in the conguration settings .[…]

  • Page 468: D-Link DNS-327L

    463 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix A — T echnical Specications T echnical Specications Standards • IEEE 802.3 • IEEE 802.3ab • IEEE 802.3u • AFP • Bonjour • CIFS/SMB • DDNS • DHCP Client • FTP over SSL/TLS, FXP • HT TP/HT TPS • LL TD • NFS • NTP • PnP — X • T CP/IP • UPnP A V • USB 3.0 • W ebDA V Sup[…]

  • Page 469: D-Link DNS-327L

    464 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix A — T echnical Specications Backup Management • Schedule Backup from PC to NAS (D-Link ShareCent er™ Sync) • Schedule Local Backups • Schedule Remote Backup • Apple T ime Machine Suppor t • USB Backup • Cloud Backup (Amazon S3) Device Management • Internet Explorer 8+, Mozilla F iref ox 4[…]

  • Page 470: D-Link DNS-327L

    465 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix B — C ontacting T echnical Suppor t C ontac ting T echnical Suppor t U .S. and Canadian customers can c ontact D -Link technical suppor t through our website or b y phone. Befor e you contact technical suppor t, please hav e the following r eady : • Model number of the product (e.g . DNS-327L) • Hardwar[…]

  • Page 471: D-Link DNS-327L

    466 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix C — W arranty W arr anty Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, D-Link Systems, Inc. (“D-Link”) provides this Limited W arranty: • Only to the person or entity that originally purchased the pr oduct from D -Link or its authorized reseller or distributor . • Only for products purchased[…]

  • Page 472: D-Link DNS-327L

    467 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix C — W arranty Limited S oft ware W arranty: D-Link warrants that the soft ware portion of the product (“Sof tware ”) will substantially conform to D-Link ’ s then current functional specications for the Software, as set f or th in the applicable documentation, from the date of orig inal retail purc[…]

  • Page 473: D-Link DNS-327L

    468 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix C — W arranty • After an RMA number is issued , the defective product must be pack aged securely in the original or other suitable shipping package o ensure that it will not be damaged in tr ansit, and the RMA number must be prominen tly marked on the outside of the pack age. Do not include any manuals or[…]

  • Page 474: D-Link DNS-327L

    469 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix C — W arranty Limitation of Liability: T O THE MA XIMUM EXTENT PERMIT TED BY LA W , D -LINK IS NO T LIABLE UNDER ANY CONTRA C T , NEGLIGENCE, STRIC T LIABILIT Y OR O THER LEGAL OR EQUIT ABLE THEORY FOR ANY L OSS OF USE OF THE PRODUC T , INCONVENIENCE OR DA MAGES OF AN Y CHARAC TER, WHETHER DIREC T , SPECIAL[…]

  • Page 475: D-Link DNS-327L

    470 D-Link DNS -327L User Manual Appendix C — W arranty FC C Stat ement: This equipment has been test ed and found to comply with the limits f or a Class B device, pursuant t o Part 15 of the FCC Rules . These limits ar e designed to pr ovide reasonable prot ection against har mful interference in a r esidential installation. This equipment gener a[…]

  • Page 1
    Version 1.0 | 27/03/2013 User Manual ShareCenter™ + 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure DNS-327L…
  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    Creating Multiple Users …….. 156 Modify Users …………. 160 Configuration …………..87 Deleting Users ……….164 Managing your DNS-327L …………87 Importing Users ……….165 D-Link Storage Utility …………..88 Creating a Group ……….168 D-Link Storage Utility — For Mac ……….90 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 3
    Installing Add-Ons from the Setup Wizard .. 226 Photo Album Wizard ……….258 Installing Add-ons from the Web UI ….229 Editing Photos in an Album ……262 AFP Service ………….. 231 Select a Photo as a Cover image…… 265 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 4
    Share a Photo to Facebook …….. 273 My Music — The Categories ……..325 Share a Photo to Flickr ……..276 My Music — Music on your DNS-327L ….326 Deleting an Album ……….279 My Music — Playback Music on an Apple device 328 Refreshing the Album Database …..
  • Page 5
    Time Machine — Delete a Volume ….419 Setting up a printer using Mac OS 10.8 ……USB Backups …………422 ………………..469 MTP Backups …………. 423 USB Backups …………. 423 MTP Backup Process……..424 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 6: Product Overview

    The DNS-327L also has several Add-on features to enhance your experience, including PhotoCenter, Blogging, Transmission and Audio Streamer among others. 1 Hard Drive(s) not included. 2 D-Link cannot guarantee full compatibility or proper playback with all codecs. Playback capability depends on the codec support of the UPnP™ AV media player. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 7: Before You Begin

    • Windows® XP (with Service Pack 2), Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8 • Mac OS® X 10.5.6 or greater • 3.5” SATA Hard Drive(s) Package Contents • D-Link ShareCenter™ DNS-327L • CD-ROM with Manual and Software • Quick Installation Guide • 12VDC 3A Output Power Adapter •…

  • Page 8: Features

    Section 1 — Product Overview Features ™ DNS-327L The ShareCenter is an easy to install data storage platform used for remote access through a local network or from the ™ Internet. This ShareCenter supports up to 2 SATA hard drives and includes the product features listed below: „…

  • Page 9
    System Management • Share Folder Level Permission • Support mydlink portal • Supports ISO mount • Support D-Link Storage Utility / Setup Wizard • ISO creator • OS Support: Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8 and Mac OS X „ Remote File Sharing •…
  • Page 10
    • Access, and Manage (Copy, Move, Delete, Rename, zip/ • Comply with DLNA HNv1.5 unzip) Files through Web Browser • D-Link new Media Player (including Boxee) compatible • Open Files on Web Browser or from PC’s Default Program • Supports Logitech Squeeze Center •…
  • Page 11
    • AjaXplorer • aMule • phpMyAdmin • phpBB • Joomla • Transmission „ Web Browsers supported • Internet Explorer 8+ • Mozilla Firefox 4 • Apple Safari 4+ • Google Chrome 3+ • Opera 10 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 12: Checking The Hardware Requirements

    Section 1 — Product Overview Checking the Hardware Requirements To use your DNS-327L, you will need at least one hard drive. If you plan to use RAID 1, which protects your data against one hard drive failure, you will need two hard drives.

  • Page 13: Hardware Overview

    Press once to activate USB or press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds to release USB activity. Left HDD/Right HDD Indicates the position of the drive (Left or Right) LED Indicators Illuminates blue or red depending on activity (see the next page for details) DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 14: Led Description

    HDD On/Off: Orange Light(s) — the hard drives are faulty No Light(s) — the hard drives are inactive HDD On/Off: White Light(s) — the hard drives are working Blinking Orange Light(s) — the HDD(s) is writing/reading DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 15: Rear Panel (Connections)

    Press the latch to release the Top Panel and insert or remove the hard drives Latch ™ Prevent theft by tying a cable to the ShareCenter NAS and a desk. Cable is sold separately. Security Lock DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 16: Bottom Panel

    Product Details Reset Button COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Information about the product — DNS-327L Serial Number, Part Number, Manufacturer Number Product Details Press and hold this button for more than 5 seconds to reset the unit to factory defaults. Reset Button DNS-327L…

  • Page 17: Getting Started

    This User Guide will help you get your ShareCenter™ set up in just a few steps. To install the ShareCenter™ on your local network, refer to the steps below, or skip to page 17 to run the setup wizard which will show you how to install and configure your DNS-327L. Step 1 — Remove the top panel by firmly Step 2 — Once the faceplate is unlatched, pressing the latch at the back.

  • Page 18
    If a drive is not properly set in place, the hard drive LED will not illuminate after powering on the device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 19
    Ethernet port. This cable should connect the ShareCenter™ to your local network via a router, switch, or directly to a computer for configuration (cross-over cable required). Step 7 — Connect the power adapter to the power receptacle. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 20: Zero Configuration Setup

    DNS-327L by simply plugging it in and connecting it to your router. Connect your NAS to your mydlink-enabled Cloud Router and Zero Configuration will automatically configure your DNS-327L and automatically add it to your mydlink account. After the short time it takes to do this you can remotely access your NAS from the www.mydlink.com website to manage and monitor your DNS-327L.

  • Page 21
    Open a web browser and login to your mydlink account. The mydlink page will check for new devices and display a New device Found! pop-up notification in the bottom-left corner. Click the notification to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 22
    Double-click the device to add it to your mydlink devices. If you wish to add it immediately, click Yes, but if you are unsure of what to do click No. The pop-up screen displays the Device Name, mydlink number, Network Name, and Admin Password. If you are unsure of what to do, you can always go back to Advanced Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 23
    Section 2 — Getting Started After the DNS-327L is registered, you will be able to access all information about the NAS from the cloud service. This service is already available locally but the mydlink service provides a way for you to view these details from any location. From this location, you can view all physical disk information, and configure RAID.
  • Page 24
    If you have decided to format your NAS using mydlink, select the RAID method from the drop-down list and the click Format button. A pop-up message appears asking you to confirm your choice to format the volume using mydlink. Click Yes to format, No to return to the menu. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 25
    Section 2 — Getting Started The format process takes a while to finish. The format process depends on the speed of your network connection and client CPU. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 26
    Section 2 — Getting Started Once the format process is complete, mydlink cloud will show you the RAID status and the Volume Status. It also displays the size of the drive avaiable and used. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 27: Mydlink On The Dns-327L

    DNS-327L The DNS-327L provides a different UI experience than the usual NAS interface. once connected to the mydlink service. Click the Application button you can access My Music, My Files, My Photos, and P2P Downloads from the main panel.

  • Page 28: Windows Installation

    Note: Windows Firewall presents you with a warning message to unblock the device. Click Unblock to give your computer access to the NAS. Step 2 — Select the Language of your choice and then click the Start button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 29
    Step 3 — Follow the instructions to remove the top cover of your ShareCenter™ . Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Attach the Hard Drives Bracket(s) to the side of the hard drives as indicated. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 30
    Section 3 — Installation Step 5 — Slide one, or two hard drive into an available hard drive bay of your ShareCenter™. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 31
    Click Next to continue. Step 7 — Connect a CAT5 Ethernet cable to your ShareCenter™ and connect the other end to a switch or router (Local LAN). Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 32
    Step 9 — With the power on, press the Next button on the device and check and make sure the IP address of your ShareCenter™ matches what you see on the screen. Note: Allow 1-2 minutes for the DNS-327L to be recognized. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L…
  • Page 33
    Section 3 — Installation Step 10 — A warning message will appear prompting you to confirm the device. Click Yes, to proceed. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 34
    Step 12 — In this step you can create a new password for the Admin username. It is recommended you set a password, however you may also leave the fields blank. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 35
    Click Next to continue. You may also use DHCP to configure the IP network settings of the ShareCenter™. In this situation, leave the parameters blank as your router should automatically configure them. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 36
    Set the Date & Time settings using the calendar drop-down menu. Configure the time settings by manually configuring the Hour, Minute, and Second settings or just click the “Set time from my computer” button. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 37
    RAID format offers. See illustrations below and check the Knowledge Base at the back of this manual for more RAID descriptions. Skip this step if you have setup this system before. By default Standard is selected. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 38
    Section 3 — Installation Step 17 — Select JBOD to see your configuration options. Step 17 — Select RAID 0 to see your configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 39
    RAID configuration. Please see images further down for other configurations. Note — Once you have configured the RAID of your choice, skip ahead to Step 41. Otherwise scroll through this manual to view other RAID installation options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 40
    Section 3 — Installation RAID OPTIONS Standard — Step 18 JBOD — Step 23 RAID 0 — Step 29 RAID 1 — Step 35 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 41
    NAS directly. The Map Drive assigns a letter to each Volume on your NAS. See Mapping a Drive further in the manual for more details. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 42
    Section 3 — Installation Once you have completed the previous step, the Wizard automatically creates mapping drives to your configured Volumes. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 43
    PREV to go back and change your settings. Read the details carefully before making your choice. Step 21 — When you click Next, you are prompted to verify your decision before you continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 44
    Section 3 — Installation Step 22 — The Wizard software starts the formatting process. Initializing, formatting and finally Success. This completes the Format process. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 45
    Step 24 — Under JBOD more than one disk is classified as a complete Volume so when mapping a drive, only one drive letter is needed. Map Drive to Network only shows one drive. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 46
    Step 25 — The Volume Configuration Summary displays a detailed summary of JBOD. Click Next to continue. Step 26 — Click Next, you are prompted to verify your decision before you continue. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 47
    Section 3 — Installation Step 27 — The JBOD is initialized, formatted, and complete in 3 easy steps. Do not click any buttons while this process is ongoing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 48
    Section 3 — Installation Step 28 — To verify your JBOD, login to your NAS, go to Management. Disk Management, and Hard Drive Configuration. This shows the current status of your drives. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 49
    2 Volumes. To explain, if the size of the two drives are different , the spare drive space will be formatted as a JBOD volume. It is better to have drives of the same sizes. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 50
    Section 3 — Installation Step 31 — The Volume Configuration Summary, displays the details of the new configuration. Click Next to continue. Step 32 — Verify your configuration selection before continuing. Click Yes to continue DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 51
    Section 3 — Installation Step 33 — The RAID 0 is initialized, formatted, and complete in 3 easy steps. Do not click any buttons while this process is ongoing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 52
    Section 3 — Installation Step 34 — To verify your RAID 0, login to your NAS, go to Management. Disk Management, and Hard Drive Configuration. This shows the current status of your drives. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 53
    Drive to Network indicates that the NAS has separated the drive into a RAID array. Note: If the size of these two drives are different, the spare drive space will be formatted as JBOD Volume. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 54
    Section 3 — Installation Step 37 — The Volume Configuration Summary, displays the details of the new configuration. Click Next to continue. Step 38 — Verify your configuration selection before continuing. Click Yes to continue DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 55
    Section 3 — Installation Step 39 — The RAID 1 is initialized, formatted, and complete in 3 easy steps. Do not click any buttons while this process is ongoing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 56
    Section 3 — Installation Step 40 — To verify your RAID 1, login to your NAS, go to Management. Disk Management, and Hard Drive Configuration. This shows the current status of your drives. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 57
    Alternatively, you can install the add-on packages available on the CD or from the D-Link website at a later stage. Refer to page 223 for details. Click Next to accept these installations or click SKIP to continue. If…
  • Page 58
    Step 43 — Opting to download the Squeeze Center automatically opens your default browser to download the application. Once Squeeze Center is downloaded, continue with the rest of the installation. Click Save to save the file to your local hard drive. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 59
    Section 3 — Installation Step 44 — Copy the Squeeze Center package from your local hard drive to Volume_1 of the ShareCenter™ . DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 60
    Section 3 — Installation Step 45 — Watch the Add-on Packages being installed. Step 46 — Once the Add-on Packages are installed click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 61
    Section 3 — Installation Step 47 — The next two screens displays the installed Add-on Packages. Click Next to continue to the next window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 62
    Section 3 — Installation Connecting to the mydlink Step 48 — D-Link has provided a mydlink service that allows you to remotely access the files from your NAS through the mydlink portal. Read the installation instructions and wait for the process to complete.
  • Page 63
    Click Next to continue. Step 50 — When the wizard fails to connects you to the mydlink servers and configures your cloud service, the following screen appears to warn you of your network configuration. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 64
    Enter your email address and a password that you can remember. Then retype the password, enter a First Name and a Last Name. Then click the checkbox that reads: “I accept the mydlink terms and conditions. ” Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 65
    Section 3 — Installation Step 53 — A message appears asking you to verify your email address and account. Click OK to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 66
    Click Finish to continue. Step 55 — The ShareCenter™ Setup Wizard is complete. Click Finish to exit the wizard and start using your DNS-327L. Your ShareCenter™ is now installed and ready to use. If your drives are mapped using the wizard, you will be able to access them under your ‘My Computer’…
  • Page 67: Mapping A Drive

    Section 3 — Installation Mapping a Drive Map a Volume on your DNS-327L using Windows® Explorer in Windows® 7. Step 1 — Press the Windows key and the letter E on your keyboard at the same time. The right-side panel displays a list of your hard drives, removable storage, and network locations.

  • Page 68
    Step 3 — Windows will automatically detect all devices on your network including your ShareCenter™ Step 4 — Click on your ShareCenter™ to see the volumes you created earlier. Then select the volume that you wish to access and click OK. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 69
    Step 5 — After selecting your volume, click Finish to proceed. Step 6 — The drive will then appear in your Windows® Explorer under Network. This means the drive is active and ready for use. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 70: Alternative Methods To Mapping A Drive

    Section 3 — Installation Alternative methods to Mapping a Drive You can also map a drive using the D-Link Storage Utility. Once the DNS-327L is discovered in the Storage Utility, and the LAN configuration settings are complete, finding the drives happens automatically.

  • Page 71: Mac — Setup Wizard Installation

    Mac — Setup Wizard Installation To run the Setup Wizard, insert the ShareCenter™ CD into your CD-ROM drive. Step 1 — When the autorun screen appears, double- click the dmg file. Step 2 — Double-click the SetupWizardDNS icon. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 72
    Step 4 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Pull the Top out) and click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 73
    Section 3 — Installation Step 5 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Attach the Hard Drive Bracket(s) and click Next. Step 6 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Install the Hard Drive(s) and click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 74
    Section 3 — Installation Step 7 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Attach the Faceplate) and click Next. Step 8 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Connect to your Network) and click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 75
    Step 9 — Follow the instructions on the screen (Power on the NAS) and click Next. Step 10 — Return to the DNS-327L on your desktop and click the device if you see it onscreen. Alternatively, if you do not see the DNS-327L , check the settings as explained previously.
  • Page 76
    If all is working, click Yes. Otherwise click No and check your set up again. Step 12 — Enter an admin Password. If you have setup this system before, use the password you used before. Otherwise leave the password field blank. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 77
    Step 14 — Create a new password and verify that password by filling in the Confirm Password field. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 78
    IP. In this window, we select Static IP (you manually configure the Device IP ) and click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 79
    Select a NTP server from the drop-down list. Enter a Date and Time manually or click Set time from my computer. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 80
    Knowledge Base at the back of this manual for more RAID descriptions. Skip this step if you have setup this system before Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 81
    Step 22 — Before the RAID configuration is set, a warning message appears to inform you that all data will be erased. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 82
    Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. Step 24 — The formated process is successful. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 83
    Step 26 — To install the Add-ons, select the Add-ons. you wish to install. The Squeeze Center is the only Add-on that is not checked by default. When you click this. download details are provided. Click OK. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 84
    Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. Step 28 — The Add-on packages are installed. Click Next. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 85
    Click Next to view the next screen. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 86
    Step 32 — Setup the mydlink administration. Click Next to view the next screen. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 87
    Click OK to continue. Check your connection settings or your NAS settings. Click Previous if you want to go back and make changes to any parts of your past configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 88
    Enter your email address and a password that you can remember. Then retype the password, enter a First Name and a Last Name. Then click the checkbox that reads: “I accept the mydlink terms and conditions.” Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 89
    The wizard provides you with a mydlink number. You can also tick the Add mydlink to My Favorites checkbox, or Save a shortcut to mydlink on my computer checkbox. You can use this mydlink number for future reference. Click Finish to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 90
    Section 3 — Installation Step 39 — The setup is complete. Click Finish. Step 40 — You can now view the DNS-327L in the Finder on the left panel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 91
    Section 3 — Installation Step 41 — Click the icon to view contents on your NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 92: Configuration

    Section 4 — Configuration Configuration Managing your DNS-327L ™ ShareCenter Web UI (User Interface) is a browser-based utility that allows you to manage and configure the different tools and services. The Web UI is divided into three main sections: 1. Home 2.

  • Page 93: D-Link Storage Utility

    DHCP assigned IP address, the ShareCenter™ will be automatically assigned a 169.254.xxx.xxx address. It is recommended that you use the included D-Link Storage Utility software when accessing and configuring the ShareCenter™ for the first time. If you want to change the IP address before logging in or you are having trouble connecting to the ShareCenter™…

  • Page 94
    ShareCenter. ™ If your network is using a DHCP server and the computer receives IP settings from DHCP server, the ShareCenter ™ will automatically be in the same subnet. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 95: D-Link Storage Utility — For Mac

    Step 1: To get started with the ShareCenter™ Storage Utility for Mac, insert the supplied CD into your CD-ROM drive: Double-click the .dmg file. Step 2: Double-click the .dmg file to install the program. In the end you should have the D-link Storage Utility for Mac. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 96
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 3: This opens the D-Link Storage Utility Step 4: Make sure you are connected to your local LAN. Click the Refresh button. The D-Link Storage Utility displays the D-Link DNS-327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 97
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 5: The Storage Utility now shows the DNS-327L, the LAN configuration (toggle between DHCP and manual), and the Volume details. Use the drop-down list to configure your LAN settings and click Apply. Step 6: To configure the NAS, click the configuration button. This opens your default browser.
  • Page 98
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 7: To map the NAS volume, select a Volume from the list then click the Connect button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 99
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 8: The Log-in window appears. Select Guest or Registered User. Step 9: Enter a username and password for the DNS-327L and click Connect. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 100
    Click OK to continue. Use the Disconnect button to disconnect from the mapped drive(s). Step 11: Finder now opens the drive and displays the DNS-327L under the Shared column on the left and the Volumes on the right.
  • Page 101
    Section 2 — Getting Started Step 12: When you click the About button it displays the software version number. This comes in handy when updating to a new version. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 102: Web Ui Login

    Section 4 — Configuration Web UI Login To access the Web UI, open the D-Link Storage utility, select DNS-327L from the Network Storage Device list, then click the Configuration button. The following screen will appear: Select System Administrator and enter the password created during the Setup Wizard.

  • Page 103: Web Ui General Layout

    Section 4 — Configuration Web UI General Layout Home After logging in, the ShareCenter™ Home’ tab will appear. You will see the Applications and Management tabs alongside of it. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 104: Applications

    Section 4 — Configuration Applications The Applications tab contains FTP/HTTP Downloads, Remote Backups, Local Backups, P2P Downloads, My Files, and Amazon S3 icons. Click on each icon to see the submenus. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 105: Management

    Section 4 — Configuration Management The Management tab contains the Setup Wizard, Disk Management, Account Management, Network Management, Application Management, System Management, and Status icons. Click on each icon to see the submenus. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 106: Management

    Setup Wizard that allows you to quickly configure some of the basic device settings. Click the Setup Wizard icon to start The ShareCenter the Setup Wizard. Step 1 — Click the Run Wizard button to start the setup wizard. Step 2 — Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 107
    Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Set the time zone from the drop-down menu to the appropriate geographical zone closest to your location. Click Next to continue or click Skip to ignore these settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 108
    Step 5 — Select DHCP to obtain IP settings automatically from a DHCP server (router) or Static to assign the parameters below manually. IP Address: Enter an IP address for the DNS-327L. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask of your network.
  • Page 109
    Click Next to continue or click Skip to ignore these settings. Step 8 — Click Anonymous to create a random account with no specific settings. Click the Test Email button to test your settings. Click Next to continue or click Skip to ignore these settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 110
    Step 9 — Click the Previous button to go back and check your settings. If you are satisfied with the settings, click the Finish button to save and complete the wizard. Click Exit to end the wizard without saving the settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 111: Disk Management

    Note: You can still rebuild a drive using the RAID 1 functionality however you must initiate the rebuild manually. Manual Rebuild Now: If Auto-Rebuild is disabled then you can use the Manual Rebuild option by clicking this button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 112: Hard Drive Configuration Wizard

    RAID format. The following is an example of a standard volume configuration: The Hard Drive Configuration page displays the current RAID configuration under ‘Current RAID Type’ . Click Set RAID Type and Re-Format. The Setup Wizard begins. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 113
    Section 4 — Configuration The ‘Physical Disk Information’ page displays all of the hard drives on the DNS-327L. It shows the array number, vendor, model, serial number, and drive capacity. Click Next to continue. Select the format you want by clicking on the RAID type box (highlight in blue).
  • Page 114
    Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. A warning messege appears indicating a slowdown in access speeds. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 115
    The Volume Configuration Summary, shows a mapping of the Volume Name, the RAID type, the File System used, the Size, and the Disk. Click Format to continue, Previous to go back to your past settings, or Exit to cancel any changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 116
    A warning message will appear to inform you that all volumes and data will be formatted and erased. Click Yes to continue. Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 117
    If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. The system will now update all of the changes made. Please be patient during this process. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 118
    The wizard is now complete. It shows the Volume number(s), file system selected, the type of RAID, and the disk formation in the RAID. Click Finish to complete the process and start using your DNS-327L. Confirm encryption on the Volume by going to Management, Disk Management, Volume Encryption.
  • Page 119
    Select the encrypted Volume and click the Save button. This will save the Encrypted Key on your local hard drive for future reference. Save the file to your local hard drive. Depending on your browser, click OK to save DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 120: Jbod

    Volume Encryption encodes your Volumes to keep it safe from hackers. Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 121
    Click Auto Mount if you wish the encrypted file to be automatically mounted. Enter a password and re-enter the same password to verify your settings. Click Next to continue, Previous to edit any settings, or Exit to leave the configuration process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 122
    The Volume Configuration Summary, shows a mapping of the Volume Name, the RAID type, the File System used, the Size, and the Disk. Click Format to continue, Previous to go back to your past settings, or Exit to cancel any changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 123
    A warning message will appear to inform you that all volumes and data will be formatted and erased. Click Yes to continue. Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 124
    If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. The system will now update all of the changes made. Please be patient during this process. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 125
    The wizard is now complete. It shows the Volume number(s), file system selected, the type of RAID, and the disk formation in the RAID. Click Finish to complete the process and start using your DNS-327L. In order to confirm the Volume on the drive is encrypted. go to Management, Disk Management, Volume Encryption.
  • Page 126: Raid 0

    RAID size or enter an amount in the field provided. Click the “Configure the remaining disk space as JBOD” if you wish to use the remaining space for another RAID configuration. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 127
    Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. A warning messege appears indicating a slowdown in access speeds. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 128
    Click Next to continue, Previous to edit any settings, or Exit to leave the configuration process. If you do not enter a password in the field provided, a message will prompt you to do so. Click Yes to enter Auto Mount and Password details. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 129
    Check the details on the list and click Format to continue or click Previous to make changes. A warning message will appear to inform you that all volumes and data will be formatted and erased. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 130
    Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. The system formats the Volume. If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 131
    The wizard is now complete. It shows the Volume number(s), file system selected, the type of RAID, and the disk formation in the RAID. Click Finish to complete the process and start using your DNS-327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 132
    Section 4 — Configuration The wizard returns you to main Hardware Configuration page. Under Current RAID Type, you can view your changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 133: Raid 1

    Section 4 — Configuration RAID 1 Select RAID 1 to mirror all the hard drives. Click Next to continue. View the Physical Disk Information. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 134
    RAID size or enter an amount in the field provided. Click the “Configure the remaining disk space as JBOD” if you wish to use the remaining space for another RAID configuration. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 135
    Volume Encryption encodes your Volumes to keep it safe from hackers. Select the Volume you wish to encrypt by clicking in the box next to it. You can select one Volume or many. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 136
    Click Auto Mount if you wish the encrypted file to be automatically mounted. Enter a password and re-enter the same password to verify your settings. Click Next to continue, Previous to edit any settings, or Exit to leave the configuration process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 137
    Click Yes to enter Auto Mount and Password details. Click Next to continue. The ‘Volume Configuration Summary’ shows details on all of the configured drives. Check the details on the list and click Format to continue or click Previous to make changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 138
    Partitioning will now begin. Please be patient while this process takes place. Do not turn off your NAS during this process. The system formats the Volume. If you would like to change your settings at this stage, click Exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 139
    Section 4 — Configuration The system updates. Setup is complete. Setup provides a Volume Name, File System, and Mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 140
    Section 4 — Configuration ™ Once you have completed the wizard. ShareCenter will return to the main screen. The RAID 1 configuration you just set will be displayed. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 141: Upgrade From Standard Mode To Raid 1

    Standard Mode doesn’t offer any redundancy and security of data. It is best then to migrate from Standard Mode to RAID 1. To do this follow these instructions: Step 1 — Insert a second hard drive into the DNS-327L. Step 2 — Replace the top and restart the DNS-327L.

  • Page 142
    Set RAID Type and Re-Format, the Hard Drive Configuration Wizard only has four procedures. Take a look at the two images below to compare. Click Next to continue. Format the new drive as Standard type. Set RAID Type and Re-Format. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 143
    Reconfigure the drive to RAID 1. Click the checkbox to proceed. Click Next to continue. Step 5 — Under Auto-Rebuild Settings, select whether you want to enable auto rebuild or disable auto rebuild. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 144
    Step 6 — A warning message will appear prompting you to confirm whether you want to format your hard drive. Click Yes to continue or No to exit. Click Next to continue. Step 7 — The software communicates with the hardware to build a list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 145
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 8 — The Wizard formats the hard drive. Click Next to continue. Step 9 — The System updates. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 146
    Step 10- Setup is completed when it shows final information on the slot, vendor, model number, and serial number. Click Finish to continue. Step 11 — The wizard returns to the main Hard Drive Configuration . DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 147: S.m.a.r.t. Test

    A warning message will prompt you to stop all services and network activity. Click Yes to continue the Quick S.M.A.R.T. test. The test will run and a percentage completed will display under the Progress Tab. The Start button will change to a Stop button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 148
    Section 4 — Configuration When the test is complete, the results will be displayed in the Result column. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 149: Creating A Schedule

    Click Create To view the Schedule List, click on the Schedule List arrow. A new table will appear showing details of the new schedule created. To delete a schedule, click on the Trash Can. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 150: Scan Disk

    Scan Disk provides a method to test the disk’s file system on your ShareCenter . Scan Disk scans your disks file system for errors and/or corruption. Click Management, Disk Management, and then Scan Disk. Select the volume from the drop-down list you wish to scan. Click Scan Disk DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 151
    A warning message will prompt you to stop running all services (hard drive and network activity). Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel. The DNS-327L will initialize the volume(s) and begin scanning. Please wait while the software scans the volume(s) or click Exit to cancel the scan.
  • Page 152: Volume Encryption

    Click Management, Disk Management, Volume Encryption. The encrypted Volume that you created during the Setup Wizard is shown. Before proceeding with modifying the encryption data, click the Volume you wish to modify. It turns red. Click Modify. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 153
    To change the settings for Volume Encryption, you need to enter the Original Password in the field provided. Alternatively, click the browse button to upload an Encrypted Key File. Click Next to continue. File upload. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 154
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Auto-Mount checkbox to have the system mount the Volume automatically. Enter a New Password and repeat the process. Click Apply to continue. Wait while the Volume is encrypted. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 155
    Alternatively, click Download Encrypted Key File. The file can be saved. Click OK to Save File. Please Note: Using Volume Encryption slows the speed of accessing data off the DNS-327L. However, Volume Encrytion does create that layer of security. DNS-327L…
  • Page 156: Account Management

    However access rules can be created and edited in the Network Shares menu. Click Management > Account Management. Click Users/Groups on the left side and then click Create. The User Setup Wizard will appear. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 157
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 1 — Select Create A New User Account and then click Next to continue. Step 2 — Enter the user name and password for the new user and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 158
    Step 3 — Add the user to a group by clicking the Group checkbox. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Select the network share settings. Select Read Only, Read/Write, or Deny Access. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 159
    • WebDAV is short for Web-based Distribution, Authoring, and Versioning. • Click Next to continue. Select the volumes the user can have WebDAV access to and then select whether to give Read Only or Read/Write rights. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 160
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — The final step is a summary of all the configurations you made. Click Finish to accept the changes or click Exit to cancel the changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 161: Creating Multiple Users

    Enter the amount of users you want to create. Next to the input field is the remaining amount of users you can add to the NAS. Enter a password and confirm it. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 162
    Step 3 — Add the user(s) to a group by clicking the Group checkbox. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Select the network share settings. Select Read Only, Read/Write, or Deny Access. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 163
    Click Next to continue. Step 5 — Enter the amount of disk space you wish to assign the user(s) on each volume. Type 0 to provide unlimited disk space to the user(s). Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 164
    Step 6 — The final step is a summary of all the configurations you made. Click Finish to accept the changes or click Exit to cancel the changes. The User Settings window will show a list of the users created. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 165: Modify Users

    Modify Users Step 1 — Click the user you wish to modify. The user will be highlighted in red. Click Modify to continue. Step 2 — The User Setup Wizard will appear. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 166
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 3 — Change the username or password. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Change the Network Share Settings. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 167
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — Enter the re-assigned amount of disk space you wish to assign the user on each volume. Type 0 to provide unlimited disk space to the user. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 168
    Step 7 — The final step is a summary of all the configurations you made. Click Finish to accept the changes or Exit to cancel the changes. Step 8 — A message will appear stating the user details have been changed successfully. Click Yes to exit the wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 169: Deleting Users

    Step 1 — Click the user you wish to delete. The user will be highlighted in red. Click Delete to continue. Step 2 — A message will appear prompting you to confirm deleting the user. Click Yes to confirm. The user is now removed from the list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 170: Importing Users

    Section 4 — Configuration Importing Users Step 1 — Click Account Management > Users/Groups > Import Users. Step 2 — The Import Users Wizard will start. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 171
    Check the Overwrite Duplicate Accounts box if this is necessary. Click Browse to select the file you want to import. Click Next to continue Step 4 — Assign the privileges and access methods. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 172
    Click Finish to close the wizard or go back to change the imported file. Click the “i” icon to see details of each user. Each user’s details are provided in a list according to username, group name, read/write priveledges, or access control DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 173: Creating A Group

    Step 1 — Click Account Management > Users/Groups. Click the blue arrow next to Group Settings and settings window will appear. Click New to create a new Group. Step 2 — The Group Setup Wizard will now start. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 174
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 3 — Enter a Group Name. Click Next to continue Step 4 — Click the checkbox to select the user(s) you wish to add to the group and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 175
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — Select the Privileges/Access Methods you want to assign to the group. The greyed out selections are assigned by default. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 176
    Step 7 — Select the appropriate WebDAV settings and click Next to continue. Step 8 — Enter the amount of space you want to assign to the group for each volume. Enter zero to give unlimited disk space to the group. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 177
    Step 9 — The wizard is now complete. The last step shows a summary of the group you created. Click Previous to change your settings or Finish to end the wizard. Step 10 — Under Group Settings, a table will display the group you just created. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 178: Modifying A Group

    Click the blue arrow next to Group Settings and the Group Settings table will appear. Step 2 — Select the group you want to modify. Your selection will turn red. Click Modify to change the settings for the Group. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 179
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 3 — The Group Setup Wizard will now start. Click Next to continue. Step 4 — Make the necessary modifications to the group and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 180
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — Select the appropriate privileges you want to assign to the group. The greyed out selections are assigned by default and cannot be modified. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 181
    Click Next to continue. Step 8 — Edit the amount of space you want to assign to the group for each volume. Enter zero to give unlimited disk space to the group. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 182
    Section 4 — Configuration Step 9 — When editing the quota, make sure the size is not smaller than the user quota on his/her account. Click Yes to change the quota. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 183
    Step 9 — The wizard is now complete and will display a summary of the group you edited. Click Previous to change your settings or Finish to end the wizard. Exit will cancel all changes you made. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 184: Deleting A Group

    Step 1 — Select the Group you want to delete and click Delete. Step 2 — A warning message will appear asking you to verify if you want to delete the Group. Click Yes to delete the Group or No to cancel your decision. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 185: Quotas

    Click Enable to activate Quota Settings. The status will now display ‘Started’ notifying you that the Quota Settings are enabled. To Modify a User’s Quota Settings, click the blue arrow next to User Quota Settings to reveal a table of users. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 186
    Click Modify to change the user’s settings. The Quota Settings configuration box will display the user account you want to modify. Enter a new quota amount for each volume. Click Apply to confirm your settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 187
    Section 4 — Configuration The modified quota settings will be displayed in the table. For Group Quota Settings, click the blue drop-down arrow next to Group Quota Settings to view the group quota table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 188
    Select the group you want to modify. Your selection will turn red. Click Modify. The Group Quota Settings screen will display the group you want to modify. Enter a new quota amount for each volume for the current group and click Apply. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 189
    Section 4 — Configuration The modified quota settings will be displayed in the table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 190: Network Shares

    At the bottom of the table, the user can navigate through pages and also refresh the window by click on the Refresh button. Click on the Reset Network Shares button to reset the network access list to the default configuration. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 191: Add/Modify Network Shares Wizard

    2) Configure shared folder access rights. 3) Configure network access settings. 4) View a summary of the configuration before completing. Click Next to continue. Step 2 — Select the Share Folder from one of the volumes. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 192
    Step 4 — Select the appropriate access rights for the share. Options to select from are Read Only, Read/Write, and Deny Access. This procedure can also be used to block certain users from accessing certain folders. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 193
    Click Next to continue. Step 6 — If you selected Specific user/Group in Step 3, then this step allows you to set the access rights for each Group configured ™ on the ShareCenter Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 194
    No (off ) when using file-based database applications. When enabled “Map Archive”, the file attribute will ™ be copied as the file is being stored on the ShareCenter Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 195
    • AFP is short for Apple Filing Protocol. • FTP is short for File Transfer Protocol • NFS is short for Network File System. • WebDAV is short for Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 196
    • Root Squash — Disables writing to the Root owned directories and files on the system when the user has root access privileges. • Write — provide write permission to the file system. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 197
    If you checked WebDAV as an access method, then this step will allow you to set the access parameters. Click Next to continue. Step 10 — Here a summary of the created shares will be displayed. Click Finish to save your settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 198: Deleting A Network Share

    Select the Network Share you wish to delete. Your selection will turn red. Click Delete to remove the share. A warning message will appear prompting you to verify if you wish to delete the Share. Click Yes to delete or No to Cancel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 199
    Section 4 — Configuration The deleted Share will be removed from the Network Share List. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 200: Resetting The Network Shares

    Section 4 — Configuration Resetting the Network Shares Click the Reset Network Shares button. A warning message will prompt you to confirm your selection. Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 201: Iso Shares Setup Wizard

    . To add an ISO Mount, click on the New button. An easy to configure wizard will launch. Click Next to continue. Select the ISO file to mount. Check the box to the left of the .iso file to select it and click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 202
    Click Next to continue. You can assign Read Only or Deny Access privileges to the ISO Mount share here. Click on the appropriate radio button for the privileges you would like to assign. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 203
    • AFP is short for Apple Filing Protocol. • FTP is short for File Transfer Protocol • NFS is short for Network File System. • WebDAV is short for Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 204
    A summary of the share will be displayed. Click on the Finish button to accept the change and complete the wizard. Through the D-Link Storage Utility, the ISO Mount Share can now be mapped to your computer as a normal network share. DNS-327L…
  • Page 205: Creating An Iso Image

    The following section will describe how to create an ISO image from your NAS, export the data out to your PC. Click Account Management > Network Shares > ISO Mount Share Settings. Click on the Create ISO Image button at the bottom. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 206: Iso Image Creation Wizard

    Section 4 — Configuration ISO image Creation Wizard ™ The ISO image wizard helps you create an ISO image on your ShareCenter Read the instructions for the ISO Image Creation Wizard and then click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 207: Iso Name And File Path Settings

    — DVD5 (4.7GB) — This creates an ISO file 4.7GB in size ready for burning onto a single-layer DVD at a later stage. — DVD9 (8.5GB) — This creates an ISO file 8.5GB in size ready for burning onto a double-layer DVD at a later stage. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 208
    Section 4 — Configuration Select the Image Path. Click the Browse button to select the destination folder on your NAS. Click the Volume to save it there or click New to create a new directory. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 209
    Section 4 — Configuration Enter a name that resembles the ISO file you are writing. Click Next. A warning message appears asking you to confirm your decision. Click Yes to continue or click No to cancel. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 210: Iso Tree Editing

    ISO file will be saved. Click Next to continue. The wizard will create the ISO image. Click the Auto Mount checkbox if you want the ISO file to be mounted automatically. Click Finish to close the wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 211: Verifying The Iso Image

    Section 4 — Configuration Verifying the ISO image ™ Open your Windows Explorer, click the Network icon, double-click your ShareCenter NAS. Double-click the volume you saved the ISO. Your ISO image should be there. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 212: Admin Password

    Password settings. 1. Enter a new Username 2. Type the original Password 3. Enter a New Password 4. Confirm the New Password Click Save Settings to accept the changes or Don’t Save Settings to cancel changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 213: Network Management

    Network Management controls and manages all issues referring to LAN settings. Even though your LAN settings were configured in the Setup Wizard, it can still be configured here. Go to Network Management and then LAN Setup. Click Setup. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 214
    This step allows you to configure your LAN settings. Here you can choose between DHCP Client or Static IP. If you select Static IP, you will need to manually configure your own IP settings. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 215
    Section 4 — Configuration A summary of what you just configured will be displayed. Click Finish to exit the wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 216: Ipv6 Settings

    Section 4 — Configuration IPv6 Settings Go to Management > Network Management > LAN Setup > IPv6 Settings and click the Setup button. An IPv6 setup window will appear. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 217: Ipv6 Setup

    Auto — Requests information specifically from an IPv6-enabled router and automatically configure your settings. DHCP — Requests information from a DHCP server. Static — Enter your own IP configuration Off — Do not use IPv6 DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 218
    64; no more, no less. Enter the Default Gateway, and DNS settings. Click Apply when complete. The IPv6 Settings table will now display the settings in table format. In order for the changes to take effect, you are prompted to re-login. Click OK and log in. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 219: Link Speed And Lltd Settings

    Settings button to save the new settings. LLTD: The device supports LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery) and is used by the Network Map application that is included in Windows Vista® and Windows® 7. Select to enable or disable LLTD. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 220: Ddns

    When the user clicks on the “Sign up for D-Link’s Free DDNS service at www.DLinkDDNS.com link, the user will be re-directed to the D-Link DDNS page. Here the user can create or modify a D-Link DDNS account to use in this configuration. DNS-327L…

  • Page 221: Port Forwarding

    Section 4 — Configuration Port Forwarding The DNS-327L supports UPnP port forwarding which configures port forwarding automatically on your UPnP-enabled router. Note: You will need a UPnP router on your network. Log in and click Network Management > Port Forwarding.

  • Page 222
    A message will notify you that the wizard has found a UPnP router on the network. Note that you have to enable UPnP on your router. Click the blue arrow next to port forwarding to reveal the Port Forwarding options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 223
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Add. The Port Forwarding wizard will start. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 224
    Internet via your UPnP-enabled router. Note: You can select more than one port. Click Previous to change the Port Forward Rule or Finish to configure the port forwarding on the UPnP router automatically. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 225: Application Management

    FTP server The Application Management section allows you to configure many services for your DNS-327L. The server and service settings include: FTP server, Add-ons, AFP, NFS, and multimedia services. Let’s begin by looking at configuration options for the FTP server.

  • Page 226: Block Ip List

    Click the blue arrow to open the configuration window. The window expands to include a Blocked IP list and a FTP Server Status report. Click the blue arrow to see the drop-down list. Click New to block a specific IP address. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 227
    Select Permanent if you wish to block the IP address permanently or Temporary if you wish to set a time frame. If you selected permanent, click Apply and continue. If you selected Temporary, then select a time frame and click Apply to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 228
    The Blocked IP list will display the IP addresses you blocked. Click the blue arrow next to FTP Server Status to reveal the FTP details. The FTP server is stopped by default. Click Start FTP Server to run the process. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 229
    Section 4 — Configuration After you have clicked the Start button, the Status shows Started. Open your default browser or FTP application and log-in to your FTP server. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 230: Add-Ons

    Section 4 — Configuration Add-ons Add-ons add extra services to the DNS-327L. Here is a look at each Add-on service available. AjaXplorer: ™ Ajaxplorer provides an enhanced “explorer like” interface which can download and upload ShareCenter files over the internet. Ajaxplorer ™…

  • Page 231: Add-Ons

    Click on each of the buttons of the Add-On you wish to enable. Click on each of the buttons of the Add-On you wish to enable. This installs the Add-On packages. This installs the Add-On packages. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 232
    Section 4 — Configuration The wizard installs the selected packages. When the installation is complete click Next. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 233
    Section 4 — Configuration The next two windows shows the packages installed. You can also disable it from this location. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 234: Installing Add-Ons From The Web Ui

    Section 4 — Configuration Installing Add-ons from the Web UI Open your default browser and go to Management, Application Management, Add-Ons. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 235
    Section 4 — Configuration The target program is available on the ShareCenter™ CD. Alternatively, you can download the program from D-Link’s support site and install it . Click Browse to locate the add on packages on your local hard drive. Once you have located the file, select it and click Open.
  • Page 236: Afp Service

    Network File System (NFS) service. To enable this multi-platform file system on your ShareCenter enable it here. Otherwise disable the option to prevent unnecessary CPU overhead. Click Application Management > NFS Service. Click the Enable radio button to turn NFS service on. Click Save Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 237: Multimedia Services

    The Multimedia Share Settings creates a media library from the photos, videos, and audio files. Users can upload files to the designated “Media Share” folders on the DNS-327L and have the multimedia services collate, organize and publish the data in one library. Once these photos, videos, and music files are uploaded to the “Media Shares”…

  • Page 238
    Section 4 — Configuration Go to Application Management, Multimedia Services. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 239
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Add button to connect Multimedia Shares to a Volume. Select the Volume or folder and click Apply. The wizard initializes the process and compiles the data. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 240
    Section 4 — Configuration ShareCenter builds the library automatically When the system has finished building the media library, a success message will appear. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 241: Upnp Av Server

    Click Application Management, Multimedia Services, then UPnP AV Server. Click the Enable radio button to enable the UPnP AV server. Click Save Settings to configure the UPnP AV share. Click Refresh to build up media library DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 242: Itunes Server

    Server The DNS-327L features an iTunes Server. This server provides the ability to share music to computers on the local network running iTunes. If the server is enabled, the device will be automatically detected by the iTunes program and the music contained in the specified directory will be available to stream over the network.

  • Page 243: System Management

    Language The language packs help users customize the DNS-327L to their specific region. Download your language pack from the D-Link website or the CD and follow the instructions below. When you disable the language pack, the GUI will return to English.

  • Page 244: Time And Date

    Select your time zone from the drop-down menu. Click Save Settings. You can also select a NTP server from the drop-down menu to sync the time and date with an online server. Then click Save Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 245: Device

    Enter your device name here. This name is what the device will appear as on the network. By default, the device name is dlink-xxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the MAC address. Description: Assign a device description to the device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 246: System Settings

    Section 4 — Configuration System Settings System Settings provides features to control your DNS-327L. Users can restart the NAS, restore the system to it’s original state, set idle times, shutdown the system, configure settings, and configure system temperature settings. Restart: Click to reboot the DNS-327L.

  • Page 247: Power Management

    Set the amount of idle time before the drives go into Drives: hibernation. Power Click Enable or Disable. The Power Recovery Recovery feature will automatically restart your device from Settings: a previously unexpected shutdown due to a power failure. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 248
    Power On/Off Click Enable to turn on this function. Scheduling: Enable or disable the power on/off days using the check box and configure the time for each day that the power on/off will occur. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 249: Notifications

    Select STARTTLS or SSL from the drop-down menu if it is Secure required by your SMTP server, or select NONE. Connection: Test E-Mail: Click the Test E-Mail button to send a test alert and confirm your settings are correct. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 250: Sms Settings

    Mobile Service Provider. Test SMS button: Click this button to send a test message to your mobile phone to verify the settings are correct and the API URL is functioning with your provider. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 251: Adding An Sms Service Provider

    URL. Enter your SMS Provider name here. Enter the HTTP API URL provided to you. Choose the appropriate type parameter in the drop-down menu for the parsed parameters of the URL on the left. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 252: Event Settings

    You can limit which events are sent as alerts to the Email or SMS settings by checking the events here. Event Settings: Select the information you want e-mailed to the above address or sent over SMS messages to the above mobile number. The items checked will be sent when necessary. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 253: Logs

    Clear Log: Click Clear Log to delete all the existing logs. Backup Log: Click Backup Log to save the existing logs to a text file on your computer. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 254: Firmware Upgrade

    Section 4 — Configuration Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade Page makes it simple to upload new firmware releases to the device. Please check for new firmware on the D-Link support website. If new firmware is available, download the file to your local computer.

  • Page 255: Usb Devices

    IP address(es) of the network UPS slaves to notify them in the event of a power failure. For more details, refer to the UPS Connectivity section. USB Storage Information Click the blue arrow to reveal the USB storage Information. It displays information on the manufacturer, product name, and size (capacity). Click the Unmount button to eject the USB device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 256: Printer Information

    Section 4 — Configuration Printer Information Click the blue arrow to reveal Printer Information. It displays information on the manufacturer, product type, and connection details. Click Clear Print Queue(s) to remove all active print jobs. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 257: System Status

    System Info The System Status information screen provides information on the DNS-327L. System Info provides information on the LAN port, Device Information, and Volume information. Hard Drive Info displays information on all hard drives including the manufacture details, temperatures, size, and status.

  • Page 258
    Section 4 — Configuration Click System Status > Resource Monitor, then click the blue arrow to reveal the resource details. It provides information on the CPU, memory, bandwidth, and processes in action. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 259: Home

    . Home is divided into one main subfolder called My Folder. Under My Folder resides four main apps, My Photos, My Files, My Music, and My Surveillance. Let’s take a closer look at all four apps independently. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 260: My Photos

    — Photo Albums and Photo Gallery. On the right-hand side of My Photos there are 4 main icons. The icons turn blue when you roll your mouse over it. The first icon is “Upload from my computer” DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 261
    Section 4 — Configuration The second icon is “Upload from NAS” The third icon is “Edit” The fourth and last icon is “Refresh” DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 262: Creating An Album

    Section 4 — Configuration Creating an Album Click Upload from my computer. A Create Album window pops up. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 263: Photo Album Wizard

    The Photo Album Wizard will assist you with uploading photos from your computer to the ShareCenter The first step is to create an Album. In the Album Name field, enter your desired name and then enter a description in the Description field. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 264
    If you wish to add more than one photo repeat the process or hold the Shift/Control button on your keyboard and select the photos to add. Click the Open button to add them to the Album. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 265
    Section 4 — Configuration The Photo Album Wizard is now populated with the photos you have selected. Click Next to upload the photos. ™ ShareCenter automatically updates the photos to the NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 266
    Section 4 — Configuration The Photo Album now features your Album. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 267: Editing Photos In An Album

    Click the Album. Click Edit. The screen changes. A Back button appears above Photo Gallery, to go back. A Select All checkbox appears below the Album’s name, to select all the photos to edit. The icon panel changes on the right-hand side of the screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 268
    Section 4 — Configuration Select a Photo to edit. A green check mark emphasis that it’s been selected. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 269
    Select this icon if you wish to Share the current photo to Picasa. the Photo Album. Select this icon if you wish to Share the current photo to Select this icon if you wish to Share the current photo to Flickr. Facebook. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 270: Select A Photo As A Cover Image

    Section 4 — Configuration Select a Photo as a Cover image Click the Set Cover icon. You are asked to verify your instruction. Click Yes to continue, No to exit. The NAS configures the changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 271
    Section 4 — Configuration The configuration is updated and saved. Click Yes, to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 272: Select A Photo To Move

    Section 4 — Configuration Select a Photo to Move Click My Photos, Photo Albums, the Photo Album you wish to select the Photo from. Select the Photo and click Move. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 273
    Section 4 — Configuration The Select Album window opens. Select the Album you wish to transfer the Photo to. Click the checkbox. The Photo disappears from the Album. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 274: Delete A Photo

    Section 4 — Configuration Delete a Photo Click My Photos, Photo Albums, the Photo Album you wish to select the Photo from. Select the Photo and click Delete. The System automatically deletes the file without verification. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 275: Share A Photo To Picasa

    Click My Photos, Photo Albums, the Photo Album you wish to select the Photo from. Select the Photo you wish to share on Picasa. A green check-mark highlights your selection and click Share to Picasa. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 276
    Picasa feature if you do not have a Google account. Enter your Email Address, Password and Sign In to proceed. Google requests you to grant access to Picasa Web Albums. Click Grant Access to proceed. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 277
    Share button. When you click the Share button your files are uploaded to your Picasa Web Albums and another window will pop-up to confirm its success. Note: You will have to enable Photos (Picasa Web Albums) with your Google account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 278: Share A Photo To Facebook

    Select the Photo you wish to share on Facebook. A green check-mark highlights your selection and click Share to Facebook. A pop-up window appears directing you to log-in to Facebook. Enter your details and log-in. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 279
    Section 4 — Configuration ™ Facebook requests you to access and get their D-Link ShareCenter App. Click Go to App to proceed. ™ The D-Link ShareCenter App also requests permission to post images on your behalf. Click Allow to continue.
  • Page 280
    Share. Alternatively, enter the new album name and click the Share button. When you click the Share button your files are uploaded to your Facebook account and another window will pop-up to confirm its success. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 281: Share A Photo To Flickr

    Select the Photo you wish to share on Flickr. A green check-mark highlights your selection and click Share to Flickr. A pop-up window appears directing you to log-in to Yahoo Flickr. Enter your details and log-in. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 282
    Section 4 — Configuration A pop-up window appears directing you to log-in to Yahoo Flickr. Enter your details and click Sign-in. Create a name for your Album on Flickr. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 283
    Section 4 — Configuration ™ The D-Link ShareCenter asks to link to the Flickr account. Click OK, I’LL AUTHORIZE IT, to proceed. Use your DNS-327L to access and upload files to Flickr. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 284: Deleting An Album

    Section 4 — Configuration Deleting an Album Click the Edit button. Click Delete to delete an Album. If you do not select an album, you are prompted to select an item. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 285
    Select an album, a green checkmark will indicate the selection, click the Delete icon. A warning message will ask you to verify your choice. Click Yes, to continue or No to exit. The Album is now deleted from the Photo Albums menu. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 286: Refreshing The Album Database

    Click My Photos, Photo Albums, and click the Refresh icon to refresh the entire database. Before the screen is refreshed, you are prompted to verify your decision to refresh the database. Click Yes, to continue, No to exit. The DNS-327L refreshes the system and is ready. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 287: Managing Photos

    Section 4 — Configuration Managing Photos My Photos contains all your photos on the DNS-327L. Click My Photos from the Home panel to manage all photos. Management Panel: Upload from my computer, Upload from NAS, Edit, Slideshow, Cooliris. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 288: Slideshow Toolbar

    EXIF: View detailed information about the image (File Name, Size, Image Date, Resolution, Camera, Camera Model, ISO, Exposure Time, & Aperture). Rotation button: This rotates the image at 90 degree angles. Gallery Navigation: This provides a pop-up display of all the images in the gallery. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 289
    Section 4 — Configuration Click a photo to go in full screen mode. This is similar to clicking the fourth icon in the icon list, to the right, the Slideshow icon. The screen opens in a new tab. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 290
    Section 4 — Configuration This feature plays the Slideshow. This feature adjusts the speed of the Slideshow. This feature beams your Slideshow to a Local Device or to a TV via AirPlay enabled Apple Device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 291
    Section 4 — Configuration This feature provides GPS information of the Slideshow. This feature transfers the Slideshow to Cooliris mode. This feature EXIF information of your Slideshow. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 292
    Section 4 — Configuration This feature rotates the image of the Slideshow. This feature pops up the browser window of the Slideshow. This feature EXIF information of your Slideshow. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 293
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Cooliris icon. This opens Cooliris in a new tab. Click the arrows on each side of the Cooliris window to scroll between images. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 294
    Section 4 — Configuration Click here to activate Facebook in Cooliris. Click here to activate Twitter in Cooliris. Click here to slide between photos. Click here to activate Full Screen mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 295
    Click on each photo to view separately. The photo is enlarged. On the right-hand side of each image are the social network links. screen mode. Click here to connect to Facebook or click here to connect to Twitter. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 296
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Facebook link to connect your images to your Facebook Click the Twitter link to connect your images to your Twitter account. account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 297: Beam A Slideshow To Your Tv

    Click Apple Device, the ShareCenter will connect to a shared Apple Device on the Network, a message will pop-up after connecting successfully. Press Yes to continue. Now you can enjoy your slideshow on your TV via the Apple Device and your DNS-327L DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 298: Photo Gallery

    Click Photo Gallery to view the images in your gallery. Near the top right-hand corner there are three main icons. Click here to view All Photos. Click here to view By Calendar. Click here to Refresh the page. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 299
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the All Photos icon to view all your photos in your Photo Gallery. Click the By Calendar icon to view your Photo Gallery by date. Click the Refresh icon to refresh the database. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 300: My Files

    NAS. Click My Files. The My Files window provides a list of all the Volumes created on the NAS. Click on any Volume you created to see a directory listing of the files. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 301: My Files — Icons

    Click the icons near the right-hand side of the panel to access the My Files features. Click this button to Upload files to the NAS. Files features. Click this button to Return to the previous screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 302: Upload

    To upload more files to the volume you have selected, click the Upload button. Click the Browse button to find files on your computer to upload to the NAS. Locate the path of the file you want to upload and click Open. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 303
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Upload to start the uploading process. Then click Exit to close the upload window. The file updates to the NAS and is displayed on the directory table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 304: Download

    To download files from the NAS to your computer, select the file you want to download (lighlighted in red) and click the Download button. Depending on your browser download settings, the browser automatically downloads the file to your saved location. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 305
    Section 4 — Configuration Alternatively, click the Save File button and OK to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 306: Copy

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Copy (it turns blue). Under Copy, select a Destination Path or create a new Path. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 307
    Section 4 — Configuration Enter a name for the new Folder. Click OK. Select the newly created folder and click Apply. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 308
    Section 4 — Configuration To verify that the file did copy to the destination, browse to the folder in question. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 309: Move

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Move (it turns blue) Under Move, select a Destination Path or create a new Path. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 310
    Section 4 — Configuration Selct a folder from one of the Volumes and click Apply. Browse to where you moved the file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 311: Delete

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Delete (it turns blue) A verification message appears asking for you to verify your selection. Click OK to confirm. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 312
    Section 4 — Configuration The file no longer exists in the folder. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 313: Rename

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Rename (it turns blue) The Rename window displays the original name. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 314
    Section 4 — Configuration Enter a new name for the file. Click Apply. The Renamed file is now accessable from its original location. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 315: Properties

    Under Privileges, you are allowed to change the ownership settings. The Owner, User Group, and Other users have Read, Write, and Executionable settings. Click Apply once you have made the changes for it to take effect. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 316: Create A Zip File From The Selected Folder

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any of the files in the right pane. Select Create (file name) .zip (it turns blue) The Wizard creates a zipped file in the same folder. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 317: Add To Zip

    Add to zip allows you to add to an existing zipped file. So, take an existing zip (look at the file size). In our example, “bold.zip” (the original file size) is 3.01MB Right click the file you want to “Add to zip” DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 318
    Under Add to Zip, select the zipped file you want to have the file added to. Click the checkbox and click Apply. The Wizard adds the new file to the zipped file. In the example, you can see the new file size. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 319: Unzipping A Zipped File

    Go to Applications, My Files. Browse any of the folders on the left pane, right click any zipped files in the right pane. Select Unzip (it turns blue) The Wizard unzips the zipped file. A new folder is created from the unzipped file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 320: Unzipping A Tar File

    To unzip a tar file on the NAS, select the file you want to untar (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Untar. An unzipped TAR file works when your workstation is Linux-based. The unzipping process works similar to unzipping a normal file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 321: Opening A File

    To open a file on the NAS, select the file you want to open (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Open. Select the file you want to open, right-click it. The file opens in a new browser window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 322: Previewing A File

    (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Preview. Select the file you want to Preview, right-click it. The file opens in a new Gallery-like window. Use the left/right slider to view the image or resize the image from the corner points. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 323: Share To Facebook

    Share to Facebook. Select the file you want to Share to Facebook, right-click it. The browser opens a new Window and redirects you to Login with your Facebook account to automatically upload files to Facebook. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 324: Share To Picasa

    To Share an image file on the NAS to Picasa, select the file you want to share (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Share to Picasa. Select the file you want to Share toPicasa, right-click it. The browser opens a new Window and redirects you to Login with your Google account to automatically upload files to Picasa. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 325: Share To Flickr

    To Share an image file on the NAS to Flickr, select the file you want to share (lighlighted in red) and right-click. From the drop-down list click Share to Flickr. Select the file you want to Share to Flickr, right-click it. The browser opens a new Window and redirects you to Login with your Yahoo account to automatically upload files to Flickr. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 326: My Music

    Section 4 — Configuration My Music My Music allows users to add music to the DNS-327L. Using this application, users can view, edit and play music straight from the NAS. Access music files on the network. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 327
    Section 4 — Configuration Click My Music to view the My Music features DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 328: My Music — The Interface

    My Music — The Interface Click here to playback music to a Local Device or to an AirPlay enabled Click here to Refresh the screen. Apple Device. The Music Player plays tracks directly off the DNS-327L DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 329: My Music — The Categories

    Click All Tracks to view all the audio tracks on the DNS327L. Click Albums to view all the albums on the DNS327L. Click Artists to view the playlist by artist on the DNS327L. Click Genres to view the playlist by genre on the DNS327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 330: My Music — The Categories

    Section 4 — Configuration My Music — The Categories Click Playlists to view all playlists and create new playlists on the DNS327L. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 331: My Music — Music On Your Dns-327L

    My Music — Music on your DNS-327L Access your DNS-327L from your network. Click the NAS Volume directly. Copy music directly from your local drive to the MultiMedia Shared Folder of the DNS-327L. Make sure the files are only MP3 format. The NAS does not accept .flac…

  • Page 332
    View your All Tracks window and click the Refresh button. The Playlist is populated with the same tracks you copied and pasted to before. Click Albums to view it in album view. Click Artists to view all the artists in your playlist. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 333: My Music — Playback Music On An Apple Device

    Click the Apple Device, the ShareCenter will connect to the Apple Device on the Network. A message will pop-up after connecting successfully. Press Yes to continue. Now you can enjoy your music on your Apple Device. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 334: My Music — The Player

    A Stop button A rewind button A Play/Pause button A Fast Forward button A Replay button A Shuffle button A Volume control You can also view the Genre, duration of the song, size of the file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 335: My Music — Create A Playlist

    The new playlist is created under the Playlists window. The Create a New Playlist menu appears. Enter a name under Playlist Name and click the songs you wish to add to the playlist. Click Apply to add them to the list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 336
    Click on the Playlist to view its contents. Click the Back icon to return Once you are in Edit mode, click the track you want to delete and click to the Playlist menu or click the Edit icon to add delete songs from the Delete icon. the playlist. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 337: My Surveillance

    My Surveillance The My Surveillance app works with D-Link Cloud cameras. It manages your IP cameras from the NAS and allows all streaming data to be saved to the NAS. My Surveillance can connect up to 4 cameras. Click the My Surveillance icon under the My Folder window in the Home tab. By default, My Surveillance is disabled.

  • Page 338
    Click the plug-in advisory to continue. Note: My Surveillance supports the following web browsers: Internet Explorer 8+ Mozilla Firefox 4+ Apple Safari 4+ (Windows) Google Chrome 13+. Click Save File to accept the SurveillanceCenterRealInstall.msi file. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 339
    Section 4 — Configuration Once the file is downloaded, double-click or right-click, select Open and install the program. The Surveillance Center Real Install setup wizard begins. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 340
    Section 4 — Configuration Select an Installation Folder location. Click Next to continue. Confirm the Installation is complete. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 341
    IP address, model number and bit rate speed Click Close to continue. To view the Surveillance utility in a browser, open Internet Explorer. When you log in, you can view the My Surveillance icon under the Home, My Folder screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 342
    Logging into My Surveillance for the first time using Internet Explorer, requires an add-on. The add-on pops up at the top of the browser. Click the pop up and click Install This Add-on for All Users on This Computer. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 343
    Section 4 — Configuration The Global Digital, D-Link Corporation add-on warning message pops up. Click Yes to confirm the installation. Once confirmed, Internet Explorer displays the live camera feed. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 344
    Auto Install Camera instructions to configure cameras for later use. If you wish to disable autoinstall click the Disable Autoinstall button. Click Exit to continue. Please Note: The Auto Install Camera function will not work if you modify the password on the IP cameras. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 345
    Click Yes to continue. The browser now displays the Live View. However, if you do not have any cameras connected, the view finder will have no video stream to show. Close the browser tab to exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 346: My Surveillance

    Click on this link to get a Live View of your camera(s) Click on this link to enter Setup mode Click on this link to access Playback. Click on this link to check the Status of the My Surveillance Application. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 347: My Surveillance — Live View

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Live View Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. Live Video DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 348: My Surveillance — Live View

    Patrol Mode for PTZ Cameras S t o p / S t a r t L i v e Manual Recording Digital Zoom Camera details Camera View & General Settings Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 349: My Surveillance — Live View

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Live View COMPONENT DESCRIPTION View the live video of cameras connected to he DNS-327L via the network Live Video To Stop or Start Camera Live View Stop/Start Click the “Manual Recoding” to Stop or Start camera Manual Recording Manual Recording &…

  • Page 350: My Surveillance — Live Camera Panel Explained Ii

    Use the E-map button to toggle between the live camera view and the E-map display. The snapshot button can be used to take a snapshot of the current frame on the selected camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 351: My Surveillance — Single Camera Live Video Mode

    My Surveillance — Single Camera Live Video Mode this button to enter Single Camera Mode. The viewing angle expands to cover all other camera real estate. Click Click this button to return to Split Camera Mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 352: My Surveillance — Full Screen Live Video Mode

    Full Screen Camera Mode. The viewing angle expands to cover the entire screen. Click this Click to return to Split Camera Mode. This can be done in Split Level Mode and Single Camera Mode. button DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 353: My Surveillance — Digital Zoom Video Mode

    You can also click directly on the part of the main image you want to focus on. Use the mouse wheel to control the level of zoom. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 354: My Surveillance — E-Map View

    Note: you must have installed e-map JPEG files in order to use this feature. Click the E-map Upload button to upload images into the database. When you click this button you are directed to the E-map Upload window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 355: My Surveillance — Snapshot View

    You can copy this image to the clipboard by clicking the Copy to Clipboard button or you can save the image to disk by clicking the Save Image button. Click the Close button to exit this mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 356: My Surveillance — Motion Detection Camera Mode

    If the camera is configured to record when motion is detected, the camera icon on the E-map will change to red when an alarm is sounded or motion is detected, as shown below. When motion is detected or an alarm is triggered, click on the red camera icon on the e-map to play the recorded event. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 357: My Surveillance — Configuring Patrol Settings

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Configuring Patrol Settings Patrol Settings are dependable upon the camera you are using. The Surveillance Center works with the following D-Link PTZ cameras: • DCS-5230/5230L, and DCS-5222L/5211L (Patrol Once). Click the Patrol icon to configure the Patrol settings.

  • Page 358: My Surveillance — Configuring Patrol Preset Points

    Preset Point. This brings up the PTZ Preset Point box. Enter a Preset Name and click OK. To edit the Presets click the Preset Point icon and select whichever preset you wish to delete. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 359: My Surveillance — Viewing Preset Points

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Viewing Preset Points Click the Go to Preset Point icon. This icon directs the camera to the designated points. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 360: My Surveillance — Live Video/Playback Settings

    This allows you to select where to save the snapshots taken using the snapshot button on the live video screen and the format they are stored in. Click OK when you are done to ensure settings are saved. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 361: My Surveillance — Osd Settings

    If you have made changes and want to revert back to the default settings, click the Default button at the bottom. Click OK when you are done to save your settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 362: My Surveillance — Playback

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Playback Open Record Camera View Mode Settings/Snapshot/Sync Playback Mute and Volume Slider Recorded Video Playback Digital Zoom Playback Controls Camera details Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 363: My Surveillance — Playback

    The bottom lets you view cameras with the actual size Actual Size View a live video stream of any camera in full scream mode and press Escape to return to the user interface. Full Screen Open the recorded video information Open Record DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 364: My Surveillance — Playback

    The playback controls are used to play, stop, pause or skip through video recordings. You can also adjust the playback speed and zoom levels. This area displays the time and date of the recording, the playback speed and the current state of playback. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 365: My Surveillance — Recording Information

    Click the Play button at the bottom of the window to play the selected recording on the main playback screen. Note: You can backup or play up to 4 selected recordings at the same time. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 366: My Surveillance — Setup

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Setup Camera Setup Audio & Video Setup Recording Setup Event Setup E-map Upload Backup Server Port Setup Note: See descriptions later in this Manual. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 367: My Surveillance — Setup — Camera Setup

    Once you click Setup, Camera Setup is the first screen to configure. On the left side are the sub-menus while on the right are the configurable options. Camera Setup is divided into four sections. Wizard, Camera List, Camera Search, and Auto Install. Let’s take a look at Wizard first. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 368
    DHCP on your router to detect your camera. You may attempt to skip this preocess using the Skip button. However, once you do this, you will be unable to detect your camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 369
    The next screen appears blank if the camera wizard was unable to find your camera. If you have setup your camera properly, the camera wizard should have detected your camera. The camera then appears in the Search box. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 370
    Camera Wizard will not be able to detect your IP Camera. However, if you have, the Device Information window is automatically populated with your device information. Click the Test Camera button to view streaming video from the connected camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 371
    Select the Quota disk size based on your available disk space. Check Keep the File within the specified duration. Click the Estimate Required Space button to see how much space you have available. Click Finish to complete the Wizard. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 372
    Enter the username and password for the camera if there is one. Select the desired Video Format (dependent on your camera). Finally, confirm if the Vendor and Model are correct for your chosen camera. Click Modify to confirm the changes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 373
    Click Yes to exit. You can also delete the camera from the list. Select a camera from the camera list, click the Trash Button. A message pops up. Click Yes to remove the camera from the list. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 374
    Section 4 — Configuration A message pops up to confirm the changes. Click Yes to exit. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 375: My Surveillance -Search And Add Camera

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance -Search and Add Camera Click the Search Button to search all available cameras on the LAN Select one camera and click Add To to add the camera to the list (Camera2) DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 376
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Test Camera button to view streaming video from the connected camera. Click Modify to add the camera to the Camera list then Click Save Settings to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 377
    Section 4 — Configuration A message pops up to confirm the changes. Click Yes to exit. Under Auto Install, click Enable Auto Install to detect other IP Cameras next time you access the Live Video Page. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 378: My Surveillance -Setup — Audio And Video

    Audio and Video configures all your audio and video settings on each camera. Let’s take a look at a single camera configuration. Click Audio and Video. Here you can view all camera audio and video settings. Click on the device to see the configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 379
    Bitrate: This is the number of kilobits per second the video recording will contain. A higher bitrate means a larger output file. Audio Settings: Click the checkbox to enable Audio. Click Save Settings to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 380: My Surveillance — Setup — Recording Setup

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Setup — Recording Setup The Recording Setup configuration tool displays options for each camera. The settings including Quota Setting, Event Record and Recording mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 381
    Section 4 — Configuration Double-click the camera to expand the configuration options. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 382
    Record Mode recording • Event Record will wait for event on the camera to be triggered before it begins recording Manual Record — requires you to manually click a record button to begin recording. Record Mode DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 383
    Section 4 — Configuration Motion Detection and Copy Here is an example of a camera’s motion detection configuration page DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 384
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Copy button, you can copy the camera Recording Setup to similar cameras. Click Save to continue. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 385
    Click the blue to set normal recording mode Drag your mouse over the time frame you want to set the recording. The selected frames turn to blue to indicate the recording duration. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 386
    To record by Motion Detection, click the red box. Drag the mouse over the time frame you want to set the recording. The selected frames turn to red to indicate the recording duration. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 387
    To delete recorded frames, click the light blue Delete box Drag the mouse over the time frame you want to delete. The selected frames turn to red to indicate the recording duration. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 388
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Select All to fill in all time Frames with selected Record mode. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 389: My Surveillance -Setup — Event Setup

    My Surveillance -Setup — Event Setup The Event Setup configuration tool displays options for each camera. The basic settings relate to how you want the notifications sent. The advanced notification settings help you to configure Email and SMS notifications. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 390
    Notifies you when your history (archive) material has reached or exceeded the disk space allocated to it Archived Limit Reached These settings are activated by using the Email, SMS, or Web Page notification settings. Click Save Settings to finish DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 391
    Click the Enable SMS Notifications. Follow the instructions provided onscreen Click Save Settings when done and click Exit. Note: Make sure your Carrier provides you with the correct information otherwise this feature will not work properly DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 392: My Surveillance — Setup — E-Map Upload

    The E-map Upload configuration panel allows you to import a schematic illustration of the area/office space you want to monitor using your IP cameras. The E-map, in JPEG, BMP, GIF and PNG format is uploaded to the DNS-327L and configured to work with the camera installed.

  • Page 393
    Section 4 — Configuration Click the Browse button to find the E-map you want to use. Select the E-map and click Upload DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 394
    Click and drag a camera from the camera list on the left of the image. When you have placed the camera in the correct location, double-click the icon to change the orientation of the camera. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 395
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Save Settings The file is ready to use. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 396: My Surveillance — Setup — Backup

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Setup — Backup ™ The Backup Setup page allows you to configure the ShareCenter NAS to backup and restore the IP Camera recordings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 397
    Destination path. If you do not have a folder, click the + sign to create a new folder. Type a new folder name then click OK to continue. Select the path, on the NAS, where you want the backup to reside. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 398
    Section 4 — Configuration You should have the Folder name and the Destination configured. Configure a Start Date/Time and a Stop Date/Time. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 399
    Click Save Settings to finish. The archive table at the bottom populates as you collect data. A message pops up to confirm the configuration. Click Yes to continue and the DNS-327L starts to backup the IP camera recordings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 400
    From here you can check which archives to include in the playback list on the playback screen by adding or removing a check from the Playback List column. If you want to delete the archive, click the trash can icon for the folder you want to delete. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 401: My Surveillance — Setup — Server Port

    This page allows you to modify the ports that the Live Video Server, Playback Server and Config Server operate on. You may wish to do this if you have port restrictions on your local network. To change the port numbers, use the provided fields and click Save Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 402: My Surveillance — Status

    Section 4 — Configuration My Surveillance — Status Camera Status DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 403: My Surveillance — Status

    Log shows a history of all significant events of the Surveillance Center software. You can filter the events shown in the log by checking the checkbox for Type, Camera or Date. You also have the option to backup the log to a text file and clear the log. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 404
    Section 4 — Configuration To backup your files, click the Backup Log button. Select the Save As folder location and click Save. The Log is successfully saved. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 405
    Section 4 — Configuration To clear your files, click the Clear Log button. You are prompted to verify if you want to clear the log. Click Yes, to continue. Now you can see that your previous log disappears. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 406: My Favorites Application

    My Favorites Application The My Favorites Application section allows users to add applications to the Home section so users can easily access these applications. Follow these easy steps to setup Favorite Applications on the Home screen. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 407: Adding Applications

    Click the Add/Remove button to add Applications. Click the checkbox under each application you wish to add to the Home screen. Click Apply to continue. The shortcut is now created on the Home screen. Click the shortcut to access the application. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 408: Applications

    Click on Test to verify access to the site address and file/folder. If you selected File from the above drop- down list, you must specify the exact file in the URL path, including the file extension. (e.g. http://example.com/test/ testfile.txt). DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 409
    In addition, there is an option to delete a download event at any time. Current download statistics, such as % completed and download speed, are displayed for each event. A refresh button is also provided to produce updated listings at any time. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 410: Remote Backups

    Backup list. You must select the remote backup job first and then click the Modify button. Delete: To remove a Remote Backup job select the job in the list and then click the Delete button. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 411: Create Wizard

    NAS or Linux file system. Remote To Local: sets the backup source as the remote NAS or Linux file system and the target destination for the backup files as the local NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 412
    The subsequent backups in the incremental series contain new files and folders plus the links to the first incremental backup. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 413
    Once — Select this option to run the Remote Backup once at a specific date and time set here. Scheduled: Select this option to set the backup to occur daily, weekly, monthly per a specific schedule. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 414
    Navigation buttons: Use these buttons to move up and down in the list when there are multiple jobs configured. Refresh Button: Click this button during a backup or recovery process to monitor the progress by updating the progress completed bar. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 415: Local Backups

    Checking Incremental Backup will have ™ the ShareCenter compare identical file names at the source and destination. Files will only be overwritten if the source file is more recent. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 416: Time Machine

    Adds a NAS folder as a Time Machine destination. Delete: Deletes a NAS folder setup as a Time Machine destination. Remove all Delete all the NAS folders in the list configured as Network Time Machine Destinations. Shares: DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 417: Time Machine — On The Mac

    Enable/Disable click the Enable Time Machine checkbox. Click the blue arrow next to Time Machine Settings to see the configuration options. Click New under Time Machine Settings to access the Setup Wizard for Time Machine. Click Next to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 418
    Section 4 — Configuration Select the Volume you want to use for Time Machine and click Next A summary displays your backup options. Click Finish. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 419
    Section 4 — Configuration The wizard returns to the Time Machine table. It displays the Volumes you just selected for the backup process. The Volumes are also viewable in the Finder. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 420
    Section 4 — Configuration You can also browse the Volume in Finder. Go to System Preferences, click Time Machine. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 421
    Section 4 — Configuration In Time Machine, click Select Backup Disk. View the DNS-327L Volumes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 422
    Section 4 — Configuration Select the Volume you want to use for the backup and click Use Disk. Log in to the server. Enter a Name and a Password and click Connect. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 423
    The Time Machine backup process is now complete. View your settings once you have set your disk. To deactivate Time Machine, move the slider to OFF. This, however, doesn’t delete the Volumes from the DNS-327L settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 424: Time Machine — Delete A Volume

    To delete a Volume under Time Machine Settings, select the Volume you want to delete — it turns red. Click the Delete button. A warning message prompts you to verify if you want to delete the Volume. Click Yes. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 425
    Section 4 — Configuration The Volume is no longer visible in Finder. To Remove all network shares, click the Remove All Network Shares button. A warning message appears asking you to confirm your selection. Click Yes to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 426
    Section 4 — Configuration The Time Machine wizard shows an empty Time Machine Settings window. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 427: Usb Backups

    This section allows the user to configure the ShareCenter so that it becomes a backup destination for a USB device that is connected to your DNS-327L. MTP Backups (Media Transfer Protocol) basically backup digital media content from a MTP compatible USB device such as digital cameras, MP3 ™…

  • Page 428: Mtp Backups

    Select Copy to create a new folder in the destination folder. Select Synchronize to overwrite all the files in the existing USB folder named USBDisk1_1. Status: Displays the current USB backup status. Click on the Save Settings button to save the USB Backups settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 429: Mtp Backup Process

    MTP Backup Process 1. Connect a MTP USB device to the USB port on the back panel of the device. The DNS-327L will enter backup mode if MTP Backups has been enabled in the MTP backup settings. 2. Press the USB button to start the backup process. The white USB LED flashes briefly to display that the backup is in the process.

  • Page 430
    3. Go to System Management, USB Devices. Under USB Storage Information, you will see detailed information on the device you plugged into the DNS-327L. You can connect an Android device but enable USB debugging. 4. When the backup is complete, the flashing white LED will become solid white.
  • Page 431: Usb Backup Process

    ShareCenter™ will copy or sync all the files from the source folder to the destination folder. Please Note: No warning message will appear to indicate that all data on the destination folder will be deleted automatically. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 432
    To unmount the USB storage device, you can click and hold the USB button at the front of the DNS-327L for over 5 seconds or you can go to the USB devices menu of the System Management icon in the Management Tab of the Web GUI of the device.
  • Page 433: P2P Downloads

    Here the user can choose to enable or disable the encryption. Bandwidth You can manually configure the maximum download Control: rate and maximum upload rate. Enter the value -1 to set the respective field to unlimited. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 434: Downloads

    The Refresh button allows the user to refresh a selected download. This will remove not the P2P task list so it displays the most updated only the torrent file, but also the partially statistics. downloaded files too. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 435: Amazon S3

    With Amazon S3 support, it is possible to upload the data from your DNS-327L to Amazon S3 or download the data from Amazon S3 to your DNS-327L.

  • Page 436: Creating An Aws Account

    Open your web browser and type the following link for the Amazon Web Services: http://www.aws.amazon.com/s3. Then, click on the link at the top named “Sign Up Now”. Follow the instructions to create your AWS account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 437
    1. Access Key ID 2. Secret Access Key Save these keys in a secure location as your ShareCenter will need them to create the backup and recovery jobs to and from the Amazon S3 Cloud Storage. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 438
    You will need the following configuration data to create a backup/restore job: Step 1: Job Name Settings Enter a 16 character name to identify the name of the backup or the restore job. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 439
    Region: Select your Region from the drop-down menu. Step 3: Server Type Type: Select Upload or Download from the drop-down menu. Backup Type: Use the drop-down menu and select Overwrite Existing Files, Full Backup or Incremental Backup. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 440
    Select the Schedule Mode for the job to be executed. You may select Manual (now or later from the job list), Once (at a predetermined time and day), or Scheduled (a predetermined time on a daily basis). DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 441
    This field of the jobs controls whether the job will execute or not. If the button shows a green triangle, clicking it enables the job to function. If the button shows the red square, clicking it disables the job from executing. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 442: Mydlink

    The mydlink service offers a cloud service to DNS-327L users. Connect to the mydlink service from any location and using any operating system. If you are not connecting to the service directly from the DNS-327L, open your browser and type in www.mydlink.com. Sign into your account on the home page.

  • Page 443: Mydlink Verification

    Section 4 — Configuration mydlink Verification Check your e-mail box and click the weblink to activate mydlink account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 444
    Section 4 — Configuration mydink is verified DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 445: Mydlink Java Runtime Machine

    Section 4 — Configuration mydlink Java Runtime Machine Once you log into your account, you will need the Java Runtime machine. The screen provides directions in order for you to download it. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 446
    Section 4 — Configuration The Java Runtime machine takes a few steps. Follow the instructions: DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 447
    Section 4 — Configuration After the Java Runtime machine is installed, run the mydlink application and enter the password. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 448
    Section 4 — Configuration Once you are connected you can view your existing storage on the cloud and the DNS-327L. You can also upload, download files using your browser, create new folders, rename folders and delete folders. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 449
    Section 4 — Configuration Click Volume 1 to see its contents. Here you can create a New Folder, Upload and Download files, Delete and Rename files. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 450: Creating A New Folder

    To rename a file or folder, click the checkbox next to the file/folder you wish to rename. Click the Rename button. A confirmation window will appear for you to rename the file. Enter a new name and click Rename. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 451: Mydlink Settings Details

    Under General Information you can view the properties of your NAS. On display is the Device Name, mydlink Number, Model Name, MAC address (which is associated with your account and NAS), and Activation time and date. Also viewable is the router you are using and file settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…

  • Page 452: Sharecenter™ Nas Status

    • Check to make sure that the LED on your ShareCenter NAS is lit solid blue. ™ ™ If you still cannot access your ShareCenter NAS, reset your ShareCenter NAS and run the DNS-327L Setup Wizard again from the CD-ROM included in your package. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 453: Deleting A Mydlink Device

    Select the device you wish to delete. A warning message appears for you to verify your deletion. Enter your admin password to delete the device. Click Delete Device to proceed. An acknowledgement message appears to confirm the deletion. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 454: Deleting A Mydlink Account

    Under Profile Information, click the Delete account link at the bottom. A warning message appears to ask you if you want to delete the account. Select No, keep it to do nothing or click Yes, delete it to delete the account. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 455
    In order to delete the mydlink account you need to enter your password details. Enter your details and then click Confirm Delete. Click Cancel to revert back and keep your account in tact. The Account is deleted. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 456: The Mydlink Access Nas App

    The mydlink Access NAS App Access your files anytime, anywhere with your ShareCenter Cloud NAS and the mydlink Access-NAS app. Stream your stored photos, documents, music, and movies directly to your iOS and Android devices over 3G or Wi-Fi. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 457: The Mydlink Access Nas App — Features

    • Supports “Open in” option to open your files with different apps • Supports AirPlay for playback of your media on other devices • Supports AirPrint to print out your documents • Monitor disk usage and status DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 458: The Mydlink Access Nas App — Compatibility

    • DNS-320L ShareCenter 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure • DNS-320LW ShareCenter 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure • DNS-327L ShareCenter 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure • More coming soon! Note: If you are using a DNS-325 or DNS-345, please use the mydlink Cloud app.

  • Page 459
    : / / i t u n e s . a p p l e . c o m / u s / a p p / m y d l i n k — a c c e s s — n a s / id531078699?l=zh&mt=8 Android (Google Play) https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.dlink.nas&hl=en DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 460: Knowledge Base

    RAID, short for Redundant Array of Independent Disks, is a combination of two or more disks with the aim of providing fault tolerance and performance improvement. There are several different levels of RAID, with each one providing a different method of sharing or distributing data amongst the drives. The DNS-327L supports Standard, JBOD, RAID 0, and RAID 1. JBOD…

  • Page 461
    Because the data is stored on multiple disks, fault tolerance means that if one drive fails, all RAID 1 provides fault tolerance and protection, in data in the array will be lost. addition to performance advantages. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 462: Raid Options

    ™ Here is a list of the RAID options available on the ShareCenter DNS-327L. Standard RAID — creates a single volume for one drive or more drives. JBOD — allows you to create a large virtual disk drive by concatenating two or more smaller drives together.

  • Page 463
    RAID 1 set fails. In fact, as long as any single member of the set remains functional, you will continue to operate normally, with complete access to your data. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 464: Ups Connectivity

    Section 5 — Knowledge Base UPS Connectivity The DNS-327L supports USB UPS, giving users the ability to share the UPS on their local network and protect from an abnormal shutdown due to ™ a power failure. Connect a UPS to the USB port on the back of the ShareCenter Standalone and Network Master Mode: Log into the DNS-327L.

  • Page 465
    Click the blue arrow next to UPS Settings. There are two modes — Standalone and Master. Select Standalone to use the UPS only on the DNS-327L or select Master to share the UPS with the network UPS slaves. The UPS Status screen shows the mode, manufacturer, product type, battery charge meter, and status.
  • Page 466
    Add. Enter the IP address of the other UPS slave on the network. Click the + button to add more IP addresses. Make sure the DNS-327L and the UPS slaves are on the same physical network. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter…
  • Page 467
    Once you have entered an IP address, the system will check its database for IP address records. The UPS Settings table will display the IP address(es) you added. Your DNS-327L is now setup as the network master to notify the network slaves about critical power status. DNS-327L…
  • Page 468: Deleting A Ups Slave

    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Deleting a UPS Slave Under Management > System Management > USB Devices > UPS Setting, select the IP address. Your selection will turn red. Click Delete. The DNS-327L will process your request. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 469
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base The IP address will no longer be listed in the table. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 470: Usb Print Server

    Note: Only the print function is supported. The device does not support the copy and scan functions of Multi-Function Printers. To add a printer, connect your printer via USB cable to the USB port of your device: The printer should appear in the USB Devices menu of the System Management icon. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 471
    The Windows Add Printer Wizard will launch: ® Select the printer driver from the installed Manufacturer list or use the Have Disk button to browse for the printer driver file. Click OK to continue. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 472
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Once you have selected the proper driver as shown in the browse list then click OK to install the printer. The printer is now installed and the printer queue will appear. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 473: Setting Up A Printer Using Mac Os 10.8

    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Setting up a printer using Mac OS 10.8 Go to Management, System Management, USB Devices to view the printer attached to your NAS. Check the device settings, under System Management, Device, Device Settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

  • Page 474
    Setting up a printer using Mac OS 10.8 Download the drivers from the respective Printer manufacturers and install it on your Mac. (You need to select the proper firmware for Mac OS 10.8) Go to System Preferences, Print & Scan. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 475
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Under Print & Scan, click the plus sign. Under Add Printer, click the IP tab to add the shared printer which is connected to the NAS. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 476
    Section 5 — Knowledge Base Enter the IP address and the Queue configuration. Note: Under the Queue section, enter “lp”, (where “lp” stands for Line Printer). Under Location, select Printer Software. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…
  • Page 477
    Select your specific printer. (If you cannot find a driver for your printer, please download the driver from the manufacturer’s web site and install it.) The IP printer now appears under Print & Scan. The IP address is clearly visible in the configuration settings. DNS-327L D-Link ShareCenter User Manual…

ShareCenter™+ 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure

DNS-327L

The DNS-327L ShareCenter™+ 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure is an easy-to-use yet 
powerful and versatile solution for accessing, sharing, and backing up your important data by 
creating your own personal cloud. Keep all of your data safely stored and protected at home, 
and still have it at your fi ngertips wherever you are.

Share Your Files from Anywhere

By setting up a mydlink™ account and accessing the secure portal, users can download 
and upload fi les, delete fi les/folders from their storage device and check the status of their 
ShareCenter™+ remotely. With the mydlink™ Access-NAS app available for iPhone and iPad, or 
Android smartphone and tablet, users can view photos, stream music and videos from their 
mobile devices. Files can be downloaded from a storage device to a mobile device to send on 
or watch later. Music, movies and photos can also be uploaded to a ShareCenter™+ and backed 
up, meaning that users won’t run out of space on their smartphones or tablets. 

The ShareCenter™+ 2-Bay Cloud Network Storage Enclosure includes a web enabled fi le server 
which allows you to download your documents, photos, and other multimedia fi les from 
wherever you are. Once confi gured, simply log into your ShareCenter

TM

+ using the friendly web 

user interface to view a list of available fi les. 

Easy Installation and Setup

This enclosure supports 2” internal SATA HDDs up to 4TB capacity and installing them is as 
simple as popping the top and sliding them in. Push the latch button to access the drive bays, 
then just slide your drives into place and you’re ready. A convenient USB port on the back of 
the ShareCenter™+ can be used to either share a USB printer with an entire home or offi  ce, 
or attach an external USB storage drive for easy one-touch backup. You can also connect an 
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) to monitor power levels and ensure the safety of your data 
in the event of a power failure. Plus, you can copy the contents of a USB dongle at the touch of 
a button.

Features

Cloud Enabled with mydlink

TM

•  Remotely manage data or built-in applications from 

anywhere using the mydlink

TM

 mobile device app or 

on a PC through the mydlink

TM

 portal

•  Simplifi ed setup through the mydlink

TM

 portal with 

D-Link Zero Confi guration technology

Storage

•  Two easy-to-load hard drive bays accept any 

capacity 3.5” SATA internal drive

•  Hot-Swap feature enables replacing a failed hard 

drive without having to power down or reboot.

•  USB 3.0 port to connect additional external storage 

or multifunction printer

Performance

•  Faster, more powerful hardware and add-on 

software features provide a streamlined solution

•  Gigabit Ethernet connectivity provides high speed 

network transfers

Media Streaming

•  DLNA Certifi ed media server
•  Music & Photo Center software
•  iTunes media server with AirPlay support
•  Peer to peer download engine

Backup Options

•  Feature-rich backup software suite
•  Supports local, remote, USB, and cloud backup
•  Supports Apple Time Machine
•  RAID 1 technology helps protect your data

Create a Personal Cloud with mydlink

TM

Download the mydlink

TM

 Access-NAS app for iPhone 

and iPad, or Android smartphone and tablet, to set 

up your own personal cloud and access fi les from 

wherever you are

Stream, Store and Backup

Watch HD entertainment, manage your fi les, and back 

up your most important data simply and securely

More than just a Network Attached Storage

Built-in smart library allows you to eff ortlessly organise 

your music and photos. Surveillance Center allows 

you to create a surveillance network  with mydlink

TM

enabled cameras without complicated setup 

Product Highlights

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Азаран инструкция по применению цена уколы
  • Набазид противовирусное инструкция по применению цена
  • Indesit iwuc 4105 инструкция на русском режимы стирки
  • Nikon d7000 мануал скачать
  • Мануал на экскаватор хитачи